Akai | MPC STUDIO | manual | Akai MPC Renaissance Music Production Controller with Iconic MPC Sound Manual

Akai MPC Renaissance Music Production Controller with Iconic MPC Sound Manual
User Guide
English
Manual Version 2.7
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................ 5
Basic Concepts ..................................................... 18
System Requirements & Product Support ..... 5
Tutorial ................................................................... 19
About This User Guide ..................................... 5
Starting Up ....................................................... 19
Important Notes ................................................ 6
Creating a Drum Kit......................................... 19
Setup .................................................................. 6
Creating a Drum Sequence ............................ 20
1. Connection ................................................ 6
Saving & Renaming ......................................... 21
2. Installation.................................................. 7
Making Basic Sound Edits .............................. 21
3. Getting Started .......................................... 7
Creating a Bass Track..................................... 23
Recording an Audio Track .............................. 26
Features .................................................................. 8
Creating a Song ............................................... 27
MPC Renaissance ............................................. 8
Exporting the Song .......................................... 27
Top Panel ....................................................... 8
Navigation & Data Entry Controls ....................... 8
Other Features Explained ............................... 28
Pad & Q-Link Controls....................................... 9
Mode & View Controls ..................................... 10
Step Sequencer............................................ 28
Transport & Recording Controls ...................... 11
I/O & Level Controls ........................................ 11
Front Panel .................................................. 12
Rear Panel ................................................... 13
MPC Studio ...................................................... 14
Top Panel ..................................................... 14
Drum Loops & Chop Mode .......................... 29
Pad Muting & Track Muting ......................... 31
Sampling (Recording) ................................... 32
Sample Editing ............................................. 33
Recording Automation ................................. 33
Power & I/O .................................................... 14
Navigation & Data Entry Controls ..................... 15
Pad & Q-Link Controls..................................... 15
Mode & View Controls ..................................... 16
Transport & Recording Controls ...................... 17
2
Operation .............................................................. 34
Modes ............................................................... 76
Navigating the MPC Hardware Screen ......... 34
Main Mode ................................................... 77
MIDI Tracks ..................................................... 78
General Features............................................. 35
Audio Tracks ................................................... 81
Programs ..................................................... 35
Step Sequencer............................................ 84
About Programs .............................................. 35
Drum Programs............................................... 36
Sample Edit Mode ........................................ 90
Keygroup Programs ........................................ 37
Trim Mode ...................................................... 91
Clip Programs ................................................. 38
Chop Mode ..................................................... 98
Plugin Programs .............................................. 39
Program Mode .............................................. 106
MIDI Programs ................................................ 40
CV Programs .................................................. 41
Program Edit Mode .................................... 111
Drum Programs............................................. 112
Saving .......................................................... 42
Keygroup Programs ...................................... 124
Clip Programs ............................................... 138
Preferences .................................................. 42
Plugin Programs ............................................ 142
MIDI Programs .............................................. 143
Now & Locators ........................................... 44
CV Programs ................................................ 143
Anatomy of an Envelope ................................ 144
Timing Correct/T.C. ..................................... 46
Browser ...................................................... 145
Click/Metronome ......................................... 48
Sample Record Mode ................................ 147
Automation .................................................. 49
Global ............................................................. 49
Programs & Audio Tracks ................................ 49
Sample ......................................................... 150
Slice .............................................................. 152
Pad Tap ........................................................ 153
Pad Hold ....................................................... 154
16 Level ....................................................... 50
Pad Assign ................................................... 51
Pad Copy ..................................................... 52
Looper ........................................................ 155
Pad Mixer ................................................... 159
Channel Mixer ............................................ 162
MIDI Tracks ................................................... 165
Erase ............................................................ 53
Audio Tracks ................................................. 166
Programs ...................................................... 167
Edit Sequence ............................................. 54
Returns ......................................................... 168
Submixes ...................................................... 169
Effects .......................................................... 58
Master Outputs ............................................. 170
Overview ......................................................... 58
Insert Effects ................................................... 61
Pad Mute Mode .......................................... 171
Send/Return Effects ........................................ 68
Track Mute Mode ....................................... 173
Audio Mixdown ............................................ 75
3
Modes (continued)
Addenda ............................................................... 212
Next Sequence Mode ................................ 175
Updates in MPC 2.1 ....................................... 212
Song Mode ................................................ 177
New Features ............................................. 212
Q-Link Edit Mode....................................... 179
Step Sequencer: Velocity Adjustment via Q-Links
..................................................................... 212
Project .......................................................... 180
List Editor ...................................................... 213
Program ........................................................ 180
Faster Attack for Amp Envelopes................... 216
Pad Scene .................................................... 181
Pad Parameter .............................................. 181
Updates in MPC 2.3 ....................................... 217
Screen .......................................................... 182
New Features ............................................. 217
MIDI Control Mode .................................... 183
Arpeggiator .................................................. 217
Pads ............................................................. 184
Pad Perform Mode: Chromatic Type ............. 218
Buttons ......................................................... 185
Q-Link Navigation Enhancements ................. 218
Q-Link Knobs ................................................ 186
Updates in MPC 2.4 ....................................... 219
Pad Perform Mode .................................... 187
New Features ............................................. 219
Clip Program Improvements .......................... 219
Appendix ............................................................. 190
Next Sequence Mode.................................... 219
Additional Transport Controls ........................ 219
Effects & Parameters.................................... 190
Reverbs ...................................................... 190
Updates in MPC 2.6 ....................................... 220
Delays ........................................................ 192
Flangers ..................................................... 195
New Features ............................................. 219
Choruses.................................................... 196
Erase Parameters .......................................... 219
Autopans.................................................... 196
Workflow Enhancements ............................... 219
Tremolos .................................................... 197
Phasers ...................................................... 197
HP (High-Pass) Filters................................ 198
LP (Low-Pass) Filters ................................. 199
Parametric EQs .......................................... 200
Distortions.................................................. 201
Compressors ............................................. 202
Bit Reducers .............................................. 203
Other .......................................................... 204
Glossary ......................................................... 205
MIDI Machine Control (MMC) ...................... 210
Trademarks & Licenses................................ 211
4
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the MPC Renaissance or MPC Studio. At Akai Professional, we know how serious music is to
you. That’s why we design our equipment with only one thing in mind—to make your performance the best it can be.
This user guide explains how to create music using MPC Renaissance and MPC Studio. There is similar
documentation available for MPC products that use a touchscreen and for the MPC software application itself.
Welcome to the MPC family.
Akai Professional
System Requirements & Product Support
For the latest information about this product (system requirements, compatibility information, etc.) and product
registration, visit akaipro.com.
For additional support, visit akaipro.com/support.
About This User Guide
This manual should help you get familiar with using your MPC Renaissance or MPC Studio. For consistency, the
terminology throughout is based on the MPC nomenclature. We also used specific formatting to indicate particular
topics of significance:
Important/Note/Tip: Important or helpful information on a given topic.
Names of buttons, controls, parameters, settings, and other options are written in bold characters throughout the manual.
Examples: Press the Play Start button.
Turn Q-Link Knob 4.
Tap the Mute button.
The Velocity ranges from 0 to 127.
Set the Sample Play selector to One Shot.
Tap BPM, and then use the numeric keypad to enter 120 as the tempo.
Some parts of this manual refer to other relevant chapters or sections, which are cited in bold, italic blue characters.
Click the text to skip immediately to that section.
Examples: Read the Important Notes section before proceeding.
For more information about installing the necessary drivers and software, see Setup > 2. Installation.
To learn more about using send effects, see General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects.
5
Important Notes
Read the included safety & warranty manual before using your MPC hardware.
Before getting started and connecting devices to your MPC hardware or turning the hardware on/off, make sure all
devices are switched off.
Important:
Before installing the MPC software, make sure your computer meets the system requirements described at
akaipro.com. This applies whether you’ll use MPC software as your host software or as a plugin in another digital
audio workstation (DAW).
Before connecting your MPC hardware to your computer, install the drivers and software. Visit akaipro.com to
download the latest versions. Refer to the 2. Installation section for more information.
Setup
1. Connection
Here is just an example of how to use MPC Renaissance in your setup. Items not listed under Introduction > Box
Contents of your included quickstart guide are sold separately.
Headphones
(to front-panel
headphone output)
Footswitch
(to front-panel FS1 input)
Powered Monitors
Computer
USB
drive
Microphone
Turntable
USB MIDI Keyboard Controller
Power
6
2. Installation
Follow these steps to download and install the required drivers & software:
1. Go to akaipro.com and register your product. If you don’t have an Akai Professional account yet, you will be
prompted to create one.
2. In your Akai Professional account, download the MPC software package.
3. Open the file and double-click the installer application.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
Note: By default, the MPC software will be installed in [your hard drive]\Program Files\Akai Pro\MPC (Windows®)
or Applications (macOS®). You can also create a shortcut on your Desktop.
3. Getting Started
1. Power on your MPC hardware.
2. On your computer, open the MPC software.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to authorize your version of MPC.
4. You will need an iLok account to complete this. You can create an account at ilok.com.
Make a note of the PACE code in your account, and enter it when asked for it during the authorization/unlock
process.
5. In the MPC software, click the Edit menu, and select Preferences. Click the Audio tab and select the sound
card you want to use. Click OK when you are done.
Important:
We highly recommend using your MPC hardware’s sound card (Akai Pro MPC Renaissance/Studio ASIO). If
you need to use the internal sound card on a Windows computer, we recommend downloading the latest
ASIO4ALL driver at asio4all.com.
To view the MPC software user guide, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
7
Features
This chapter explains the features and functions of each MPC model with an LCD screen: MPC Renaissance and
MPC Studio.
MPC Renaissance
Top Panel
1
47
43 44
11 11 11 11
13 14 24 25 26
12
2 2 2 2 2 2
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
41
15
9
10
10
10
10
45
46
27 19 20 21 22 23
28 29 30 31 32
16 18
17
7
6
42
4
5 5
3
38 38 40 39 39
36 37 35 33 34
Navigation & Data Entry Controls
1. Display: This LCD shows all the information relevant to MPC Renaissance’s current operation. Much of this
information is also shown in the software. Use the cursors to navigate through the display, and use the data
dial, and -/+ buttons to adjust the currently selected setting/parameter. Use the Mode buttons to change what
page is shown, and use the function buttons to change what tab is shown.
Tip: You can adjust the display contrast by holding down Shift and turning the data dial.
2. Function Buttons: Press one of these buttons to select its corresponding tab, shown above the button in the
display.
3. Cursors: Press these buttons to navigate through the fields of menus and options shown on the screen.
4. Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the
selected field on the screen.
5. –/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the screen.
8
6. Numeric Keypad: If the selected field on the screen is a number, press these numbered buttons as you would
on a standard numeric keypad to enter a value. Press the keypad’s Enter to enter it.
7. Undo/Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
Pad & Q-Link Controls
8. Q-Link Knobs: Turn these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The LEDs
surrounding each knob show the knob’s current position.
9. Q-Link Trigger: Press this button to cycle through the three global automation states: Off, Read (solidly lit), and
Write (flashing). See Operation > General Features > Automation to learn more about this.
10. Pads: Press these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples in your software. The pads are velocity-sensitive
and pressure-sensitive, which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different
colors, depending on how hard you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest
velocity). You can also customize their colors.
11. Pad Bank: Press these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D.
Press and hold Shift while pressing these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of
these buttons.
12. Pad Assign/Pad Copy: Press this button to assign samples and specific colors to your pads in each program.
See Operation > General Features > Pad Assign to learn more about this.
You can also use this button to copy the samples and parameters from one pad to another. Hold Shift and press
this button to open the Copy Pad window. In the From Pad field, press the “source” pad. Use the cursors to
select the To Pads field, and then press the “destination” pads. Press F5 (Do It)—the samples and parameters
will be copied automatically from the source pad to the destination pad.
13. Full Level/Half Level: Press this button to activate or deactivate the Full Level feature. When activated, the pads
will always trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of how much force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate or deactivate the Half Level feature. When activated,
the pads will always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
14. 16 Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit will be
temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad, but a
selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the
minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the
Type selector to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack, or Decay. See Operation >
General Features > 16 Level to learn more.
15. Note Repeat/Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly.
The rate is based on the current tempo and Time Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not
have to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
9
Mode & View Controls
Note: See Operation > Modes to learn about the different modes you can access with these controls.
16. Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by red writing).
Double-press this button to see which buttons have secondary functions—the buttons will flash for a few seconds.
17. Main/Track: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Track View.
18. Browser/Save: Press this button to view the Browser. The Browser lets you navigate your computer’s internal
hard disk to load samples, sequences, songs, etc. Using filter buttons and user-definable folders, you can easily
adapt it to your workflow. You can also preview samples before loading them.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to save the current project (including its samples, programs, sequences,
and songs).
19. Prog Edit/Q-Link: Press this button to view Program Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing your
programs.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter Q-Link Edit Mode, where you can determine what the Q-Link
knobs control in other modes.
20. Prog Mix/Track Mix: Press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a program’s levels, stereo
panning, routing, and effects.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning,
and other settings for your tracks, programs, returns, submixes, and masters.
Important: Prog Mix on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Pad Mixer in the MPC software. Similarly,
Track Mix (or Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix) on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Channel Mixer in the
MPC software. This is due to the functionality changing as the software has evolved.
21. Seq Edit/Effects: Press this button to view the Edit Sequence screen where you can create or edit sequences.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Effects page, where you can select and route effects as
well as edit their parameters.
22. Sample Edit/Sample Rec: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using
various functions and processes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in
your projects.
23. Song/Other: Press this button to enter Song Mode where you can arrange sequences in a specific order and/or
repetition to create songs. You can edit the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly composing.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter MIDI Control Mode, which lets you edit various MIDI
parameters for the pads, Q-Link knobs, and certain buttons on your hardware.
24. Step Seq: Press this button to view the Step Sequencer where you can create or edit sequences by using the
pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
25. Next Seq: Press this button to view Next Sequence Mode where you can trigger different sequences simply by
playing the pads. This is useful for live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
26. Track Mute/Pad Mute: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a
sequence or set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a
program or set mute groups for each pad within a program.
27. Window/Full Screen: When this button is lit, it means the selected field in the display contains additional
parameters in a sub-window; press this button to access them. Use the function buttons, cursors, and data
dial or -/+ buttons to navigate the sub-window.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to switch between Full Screen and Half Screen Modes in the software.
In Full Screen Mode, the workspace occupies the whole window. In Half Screen Mode, the parameter controls (QLink knobs, pads, sequence and track information, project information, etc.) are shown underneath the workspace.
10
28. Project/Folder 1: Press this button to view only project files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this
button to select the Browser’s Folder 1 shortcut.
29. Sequence/Folder 2: Press this button to view only sequence files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press
this button to select the Browser’s Folder 2 shortcut.
30. Program/Folder 3: Press this button to view only program files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press
this button to select the Browser’s Folder 3 shortcut.
31. Sample/Folder 4: Press this button to view only sample files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this
button to select the Browser’s Folder 4 shortcut.
32. No Filter/Folder 5: Press this button to view all files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this button
to select the Browser’s Folder 5 shortcut.
Transport & Recording Controls
33. Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the playhead’s current position.
34. Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
35. Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Quickly pressing this button three times will act as a “MIDI panic” and shut off all
voices and stop all audio processing.
36. Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
37. Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
38. </> (Event |</>|): Use these buttons to move the playhead left or right, one step at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the playhead to the previous/next event in the
sequence grid.
39. <</>> (Start/End): Use these buttons to move the playhead left or right, one bar at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the playhead to the start or end of the sequence
grid.
40. Locate: Press and hold this button to activate the secondary functions of the </> and <</>> buttons (i.e., Event
|</>| and Start/End, respectively).
41. Erase: As a sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for
that pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without
having to stop playback. See Operation > General Features > Erase to learn more.
42. Tap Tempo: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). You can set how
many taps are required in the Preferences (see Operation > General Features > Preferences to learn how to
do this).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
or a master tempo.
I/O & Level Controls
43. Phono/Line Switch: Use this switch to select the Mic In or Phono In jacks on the rear panel. If you are using a
mic or other line-level audio source connected to the Mic In jacks, select Mic In. If you are using a phono-level
device like a turntable connected to the Phono In jacks, select Phono In.
44. Rec Gain: Use this knob to adjust the gain of the incoming signal from the inputs (Mic In Left/Right or Phono In
L/R) on the rear panel. Use the level meter above the Mic In/Phono In switch to check the recording level. Be
careful when setting this knob at higher levels, which can cause the signal to distort.
11
45. Direct Mon: Turn this knob to adjust the balance between the input and output signals in the headphones.
Input corresponds to the input signal—all devices connected to the inputs on the front and rear panels.
While recording, you can turn this knob all the way to Input for zero-latency direct monitoring.
Comp corresponds to the output signal—the signal sent from the Stereo Out L/R outputs on the rear panel.
When you are not recording, we recommend turning this knob all the way to the Comp position to hear the
full-volume playback signal.
46. Main Volume: Turn this knob to adjust the volume level of the Stereo Out L/R outputs.
47. Vintage Mode: Press this to toggle through the available Vintage Modes. The MPC3000 and MPC60 settings
emulate the sounds of those classic MPCs, while the Other setting emulates the sound of vintage sampling
drum machines. When none of the LEDs are lit, Vintage Mode is off.
Front Panel
1 1
2
3 3
4
1. Footswitch Inputs (FS 1/2) (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Connect optional 1/4” (6.35 mm) TS footswitches to these inputs.
2. Mix: Turn this knob to adjust the balance between the Main and Assign signals in your headphones. Main is the
signal sent from the Stereo Out L/R outputs. Assign is the signal sent from the Assignable Mix Outs 1/2.
3. Headphone Outputs (1/8” or 1/4” / 3.5 mm or 6.35 mm): Connect your headphones (not included) to either or
both of these standard stereo outputs. Use the Mix knob to determine what signal is heard in the headphones.
Turn the Headphone Volume knob to set the volume level.
4. Headphone Volume: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the headphone outputs.
12
Rear Panel
9
9
2
14
12
10 11 13
6
7
16 16 16 16 15 15
8 5
4 1 3
1. Power Input: Use the included power adapter (12 VDC, 2 A, center-positive) to connect MPC Renaissance to a
power outlet. This must be connected to a power outlet in order for MPC Renaissance to power on.
2. Power Adapter Restraint: Secure the power adapter cable to this restraint to prevent it from accidentally unplugging.
3. Power Switch: Press this button to turn MPC Renaissance’s power on or off.
4. Computer USB Port (USB Type B): Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-force USB port
to an available USB port on your computer. This connection allows MPC Renaissance to send/receive MIDI and
audio data to/from the MPC software on your computer.
5. USB Hub Ports A/B (USB Type A): Connect USB flash drives or MIDI controllers to these high-speed USB 2.0
ports. These USB ports supply power to connected USB devices and can also be used to receive MIDI
messages from external USB MIDI devices, which will be sent to the computer.
6. Stereo Out L/R (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your speaker
system. The signal sent out of these outputs is the master mix. Turn the Main Volume knob to set their volume.
Tip: To route a program to these outputs, set its routing to Out 1,2 in the Channel Mixer when the Mixer field is
set to Programs. See Operation > Modes > Channel Mixer to learn more about this.
7. Assignable Mix Out 1/2 (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to
an external mixer. The signal sent from these outputs is full-volume (0 dB).
Tip: To route a program to these outputs, set its routing to Out 3,4 in the Channel Mixer when the Mixer field is
set to Programs. See Operation > Modes > Channel Mixer to learn more about this.
8. S/PDIF In/Out: Use standard RCA cables to connect these jacks to devices that can send/receive digital audio.
9. Mic In Left/Right (XLR or 1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard XLR or 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these
inputs to audio sources (microphone, mixer, synthesizer, etc.). Turn the Rec Gain knob to set the input level.
10. Mic/Line: Set this switch appropriately for the device you connected to the Mic In Left/Right inputs. If your
sound source is a microphone, set it to Mic. If your sound source is a line-level device, like an external mixer or
keyboard, set it to Line.
11. Phantom Power: This switch activates and deactivates phantom power for the Mic In Left/Right inputs. When
activated, +48V of phantom power will be supplied to both inputs. Note that most dynamic microphones do not
require phantom power, while most condenser microphones do. Refer to your microphone’s documentation to
check if it needs phantom power.
12. Phono In L/R (1/4” / 6.35 mm or RCA): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables or stereo RCA cables to
connect these inputs to audio sources (mixer, turntable, synthesizer, etc.). To use the 1/4” (6.35 mm) inputs, set
the Phono/Line switch to Line. To use the RCA inputs, set the Phono/Line switch to Phono. Turn the Rec Gain
knob to set their input levels.
13. Phono/Line: Set this switch appropriately for the device you connected to the Phono In L/R inputs. If your
sound source is a phono-level turntable, set it to Phono. If your sound source is a line-level device, like an
external mixer or keyboard, set it to Line.
14. Grounding Terminal: If you are sending a phono-level turntable signal to the Phono In L/R inputs and are
hearing a low hum or buzz, it could mean that the turntable is not grounded. If the turntable has a grounding
wire, connect it to this terminal.
Note: Some turntables have a grounding wire built into the RCA connection and, therefore, nothing needs to be
connected to the grounding terminal.
15. MIDI In: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these inputs to the MIDI outputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
16. MIDI Out: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these outputs to the MIDI inputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
13
MPC Studio
Top Panel
3
13
4 1
2
5
16 16 16 16 17
12
6
6
6
6
6
6
12
24 25 26 27 28
33 34 35 36 37
12
12
18 19 29 30 31
22
15
14
8
21 5
47
10
23
5
7
32
11
46
43 43 45 44 44
20
41 42 40 38 39
Power & I/O
1. Power Switch: Press this button to turn MPC Studio’s power on or off.
2. Computer USB Port (USB Type B): Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-force USB port
to an available USB port on your computer. This connection allows MPC Studio to send/receive MIDI and audio
data to/from the MPC software on your computer.
3. MIDI In: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these inputs to the MIDI outputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
Important: Do not connect audio devices (e.g., headphones, monitors, etc.) to the MIDI In. Use the included
1/8”-to-5-pin adapters to connect MIDI devices only.
4. MIDI Out: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these outputs to the MIDI inputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
Important: Do not connect audio devices (e.g., headphones, monitors, etc.) to the MIDI Out. Use the included
1/8”-to-5-pin adapters to connect MIDI devices only.
14
Navigation & Data Entry Controls
5. Display: This LCD shows all the information relevant to MPC Studio’s current operation. Much of this information
is also shown in the software. Use the cursors to navigate through the display, and use the data dial, and -/+
buttons to adjust the currently selected setting/parameter. Use the Mode buttons to change what page is
shown, and use the function buttons to change what tab is shown.
Tip: You can adjust the display contrast by holding down Shift and turning the data dial.
6. Function Buttons: Press one of these buttons to select its corresponding tab, shown above the button in the
display.
7. Cursors: Press these buttons to navigate through the fields of menus and options shown on the screen.
8. Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the
selected field on the screen.
9. –/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the screen.
10. Numeric: If the selected field on the screen is a number, press and hold this button, and use the pads as you
would on a standard numeric keypad to enter a value. The pads’ values are written above in green and will be lit
green while as you press and hold this button.
11. Undo/Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
Pad & Q-Link Controls
12. Q-Link Knobs: Turn these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various
parameters and settings. The knobs can control one column or row of
parameters at a time. Use the Scroll Knob above them to change
which column or row of parameters they currently control.
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
In modes where the display shows a 4x4 array of parameters, you will
see an additional indicator on the top or left side of the array, indicating
the currently controlled row/column.
13. Scroll: Turn this knob to change which column or row of parameters
the Q-Link knobs currently control.
14. Q-Link Trigger: Press this button to cycle through the three global automation states: Off, Read (solidly lit), and
Write (flashing). See Operation > General Features > Automation to learn more about this.
15. Pads: Press these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples in your software. The pads are velocity-sensitive
and pressure-sensitive, which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different
colors, depending on how hard you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest
velocity). You can also customize their colors.
16. Pad Bank: Press these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D.
Press and hold Shift while pressing these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of
these buttons.
17. Pad Assign/Pad Copy: Press this button to assign samples and specific colors to your pads in each program.
See Operation > General Features > Automation to learn more about this.
You can also use this button to copy the samples and parameters from one pad to another. Hold Shift and press
this button to open the Copy Pad window. In the From Pad field, press the “source” pad. Use the cursors to
select the To Pads field, and then press the “destination” pads. Press F5 (Do It)—the samples and parameters
will be copied automatically from the source pad to the destination pad.
18. Full Level/Half Level: Press this button to activate or deactivate the Full Level feature. When activated, the pads
will always trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of how much force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate or deactivate the Half Level feature. When activated,
the pads will always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
15
19. 16 Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit will be
temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad, but a
selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the
minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the
Type selector to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack, or Decay. See Operation >
General Features > 16 Level to learn more.
20. Note Repeat/Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly.
The rate is based on the current tempo and Time Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not
have to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
Mode & View Controls
Note: See Operation > Modes to learn about the different modes you can access with these controls.
21. Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by red writing).
Double-press this button to see which buttons have secondary functions—the buttons will flash for a few seconds.
22. Main/Track: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Track View.
23. Browser/Save: Press this button to view the Browser. The Browser lets you navigate your computer’s internal
hard disk to load samples, sequences, songs, etc. Using filter buttons and user-definable folders, you can easily
adapt it to your workflow. You can also preview samples before loading them.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to save the current project (including its samples, programs, sequences,
and songs).
24. Prog Edit/Q-Link: Press this button to view Program Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing your
programs.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter Q-Link Edit Mode, where you can determine what the Q-Link
knobs control in other modes.
25. Prog Mix/Track Mix: Press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a program’s levels, stereo
panning, routing, and effects.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning,
and other settings for your tracks, programs, returns, submixes, and masters.
Important: Prog Mix on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Pad Mixer in the MPC software. Similarly,
Track Mix (or Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix) on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Channel Mixer in the
MPC software. This is due to the functionality changing as the software has evolved.
26. Seq Edit/Effects: Press this button to view the Edit Sequence screen where you can create or edit sequences.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter the Effects page, where you can select and route effects as
well as edit their parameters.
27. Sample Edit/Sample Rec: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using
various functions and processes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in
your projects.
28. Song/Other: Press this button to enter Song Mode where you can arrange sequences in a specific order and/or
repetition to create songs. You can edit the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly composing.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter MIDI Control Mode, which lets you edit various MIDI
parameters for the pads, Q-Link knobs, and certain buttons on your hardware.
29. Step Seq: Press this button to view the Step Sequencer where you can create or edit sequences by using the
pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
30. Next Seq: Press this button to view Next Sequence Mode where you can trigger different sequences simply by
playing the pads. This is useful for live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
16
31. Track Mute/Pad Mute: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a
sequence or set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a
program or set mute groups for each pad within a program.
32. Window/Full Screen: When this button is lit, it means the selected field in the display contains additional
parameters in a sub-window; press this button to access them. Use the function buttons, cursors, and data
dial or -/+ buttons to navigate the sub-window.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to switch between Full Screen and Half Screen Modes in the software.
In Full Screen Mode, the workspace occupies the whole window. In Half Screen Mode, the parameter controls (QLink knobs, pads, sequence and track information, project information, etc.) are shown underneath the workspace.
33. Project/Folder 1: Press this button to view only project files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this
button to select the Browser’s Folder 1 shortcut.
34. Sequence/Folder 2: Press this button to view only sequence files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press
this button to select the Browser’s Folder 2 shortcut.
35. Program/Folder 3: Press this button to view only program files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press
this button to select the Browser’s Folder 3 shortcut.
36. Sample/Folder 4: Press this button to view only sample files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this
button to select the Browser’s Folder 4 shortcut.
37. No Filter/Folder 5: Press this button to view all files in the Browser. Press and hold Shift and press this button
to select the Browser’s Folder 5 shortcut.
Transport & Recording Controls
38. Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the playhead’s current position.
39. Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
40. Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Quickly pressing this button three times will act as a “MIDI panic” and shut off all
voices and stop all audio processing.
41. Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
42. Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
43. Step </> (Event |</>|): Use these buttons to move the playhead left or right, one step at a time.
Press and hold Go To and press one of these buttons to move the playhead to the previous/next event in the
sequence grid.
44. Bar <</>> (Start/End): Use these buttons to move the playhead left or right, one bar at a time.
Press and hold Go To and press one of these buttons to move the playhead to the start or end of the sequence
grid.
45. Go To: Press and hold this button to activate the secondary functions of the </> and <</>> buttons (i.e., Event
|</>| and Start/End, respectively).
46. Erase: As a sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for
that pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without
having to stop playback. See Operation > General Features > Erase to learn more.
47. Tap Tempo: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). You can set how
many taps are required in the Preferences (see Operation > General Features > Preferences to learn how to
do this).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
or a master tempo.
17
Basic Concepts
This chapter should help explain some fundamental aspects of the MPC universe.
The MPC workflow is quite different from traditional digital audio workstations (DAWs). In most typical DAWs, each track
uses an instance of each instrument, and all tracks are always playing even if they don’t contain any audio or MIDI
information. Furthermore, your entire project needs to be arranged just as the resulting song would be. This isn’t the case
with MPC, which offers much more flexibility within your project. It’s important to understand some basic terms, though:
A sequence is a “building block” of a song. It contains multiple tracks that play at the same time like a normal
DAW. In a project, you might create one sequence for your verse and another sequence for your chorus, alternating
and/or repeating each one in a specific order to create the song. (A project can contain 128 sequences.)
A track is a layer in a sequence. There are two types of tracks:
MIDI tracks consist of MIDI data only, no audio data. These tracks produce sound by using programs,
described below. Unlike a normal DAW, each MIDI track exists only in its sequence. The advantage of this is
not having to manage empty or unwanted tracks across all of your sequences—each sequence contains only
the tracks you want to use in it. If you want to use the same track across multiple sequences, you can copy
the track from one sequence into another. (A sequence can contain 128 MIDI tracks.)
Audio tracks consist of a recorded audio signal, like a traditional DAW. These tracks do not use programs
because the audio is already contained in the track. Also, unlike MIDI tracks, audio tracks are present in
every sequence in the project, even if the tracks themselves are empty. (A sequence can contain 128 audio
tracks.)
A program is a preset through which MIDI tracks are routed. Programs may contain audio samples that are
triggered when tracks play through them, producing the sound you want on that track. Programs are
independent of tracks and sequences, so you can set multiple tracks to use the same program (unlike normal
DAWs where each track requires its own set of samples). Furthermore, you can use the same program/programs
across multiple sequences. (A project can contain 128 programs.)
Each program can be played using the 16 pads (across eight pad banks, which gives you access to 128 pads in
each program). Each pad plays a MIDI note when you press it, but that MIDI note will trigger something different
for each program. For instance, in drum programs, the pads are assigned to samples—one pad could trigger a
kick drum sound and another could trigger a snare drum sound—whereas in keygroup programs, each pad
triggers a MIDI note that plays the corresponding pitch of the sample assigned to its keygroup.
Here’s a diagram to illustrate an example of how these pieces could work together:
Sequence
Drum Program
(Drums)
Track (MIDI: Drums)
Keygroup Program
Track (MIDI: Bass)
(Bass)
Track (MIDI: Keys 1)
Keygroup Program
(Keys)
Track (MIDI: Keys 2)
Keygroup Program
Track (MIDI: Synth)
(Synth Lead)
Track (Audio: Vocals)
Mixing
Track (Audio: Vocals)
Track (Audio: Guitar)
Please take a look at the following Tutorial chapter, as well. It will walk you through the creation of a short song to
show you some of your MPC hardware’s most important features.
18
Tutorial
This chapter should familiarize you with some basic MPC features. We’ll create a short song to illustrate some of the
most important features. To get the most out of this chapter, we recommend reproducing each of the described steps.
Starting Up
Make sure you have completed all of the steps described in Introduction > Setup. This includes:
•
Installing the most current drivers and software.
•
Connecting your MPC hardware to a power source using the included power adapter and powering it on.
•
Opening and authorizing your MPC software.
Creating a Drum Kit
Let’s start by making a simple drum kit.
1. Press Browser to show the Browser.
2. Find and load a kick drum sample:
To move through lists, use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or up and down cursors.
To view only samples while browsing, press Sample/Folder 5.
To move up one folder level, press the left cursor.
To enter a folder, select it and press the right cursor.
To load a selected file, press F6/Load.
To play a selected sound, press and hold F3/Play.
To enable or disable the audition function, press F2/Auto. When enabled, each sample file will automatically
play when it is first selected.
19
After loading samples for a drum kit into the sample pool, assign a kick drum sound to a pad:
1. Press Pad Assign. The pads will be shown in a 4x4 array in the screen.
2. Make sure the Sample tab is selected (press F1/Sample).
3. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
4. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the kick drum sample. Its name will appear in the pad in the screen.
Now, you can press Pad 1 to play the kick drum sample.
To create a simple drum kit, repeat the above steps for other pads. We recommend loading a snare drum, a closed
hi-hat, and an open hi-hat.
Creating a Drum Sequence
Now that your drum kit is set up, let’s record a drum sequence.
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Press Tap Tempo repeatedly at the speed you want to record your sequence. Your MPC hardware will detect
the rate and adjust itself automatically.
3. Press Rec to record-arm the sequence.
4. Press Play to start the actual recording. You will hear the count-in for one measure before the recording starts. We
recommend recording only one sound (pad) at a time, especially if you’re not familiar with playing drums on the pads.
5. Play a simple kick drum pattern. The note events you just recorded will automatically be placed in the grid (in this
case, on 16th notes). The initial measure length is two bars. After the two bars, the recording will automatically
activate Overdub; the sequence will play again from the beginning and keeps looping, allowing you to record
further notes. Don’t stop the recording!
6. Play the snare drum part, then a hi-hat part.
7. When you’re done recording, press Stop.
If you start recording again on this sequence, keep in mind that the pads you play in your new recording will replace
existing notes played with the same pads. To prevent this, press Overdub before recording instead of the Rec
button. Overdub lets you record additional note events over the existing sequence.
The Undo button functions differently while recording. Normally, pressing Undo will undo just the last event. When
there is an event to undo, the Undo button will be lit solid. While recording, the Undo button will flash. In this case,
pressing Undo will erase all events from that recording (i.e., since Play or Play Start was pressed).
20
Saving & Renaming
We recommend doing some renaming of your programs and samples before going further. The collection of drum
samples you loaded earlier (and their respective pad assignments) are arranged into a program. When you load this
program in the future, you will be able to use all of the samples that belong to it.
Use the MPC software window to name your program and samples, and then save your project.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
Making Basic Sound Edits
Let’s make sure the samples are properly tuned and have good levels.
Press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
Press a pad to show its parameters on the screen. Make sure the Master tab is selected (press F1/Master).
To adjust its volume, turn Q-Link Knob 10 (MPC Renaissance) or the second Q-Link knob in the second row
(MPC Studio). Alternatively, use the cursors to select Level and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust it.
To adjust its stereo panning, turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the second
row (MPC Studio). Alternatively, use the cursors to select Pan and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
adjust it.
Adjust the level of each pad to suit your taste. We recommend spreading the panning of the bright sounds (e.g.,
cymbals, snare drum) a little. Additionally, you can tune the sound by adjusting the Semi and Fine parameters using
Q-Link Knobs 14 and 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the second and third Q-Link knobs in the first row (MPC Studio).
The snare drum may need some reverb to give it a more spatial sound.
Press F6/Effects to view the Effects tab. Press the pad with your snare drum sound to select it.
21
To add an effect:
1. Use the cursors to select the Insert 1 slot.
2. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
3. In the Select Effect screen that appears, use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or up and down cursors to move
through the list.
4. Select Reverb Medium and then press F4/Select to load it.
To adjust the effect’s parameters, select its name, and then press Window. In the screen that appears, use the QLink knobs to adjust the parameters. Alternatively, use the cursors to select a parameter, and use the data dial or
–/+ buttons.
To turn the effect on or off, press F6/On/Off.
To remove the effect, select its name, and then load an effect as described above, but select <none> instead of an
actual effect.
22
Creating a Bass Track
Let’s try recording a bass line. Unlike a drum kit, it’s important to be able to play and record a bass sound
chromatically, so this will be slightly different than setting up the drum kit.
Adding a bass line over the drum part means we need to work on a new track. A track is simply a layer of a sequence.
Each track uses a program within your project. You can work with multiple tracks in a single sequence (e.g., a drum
track, a bass track, a piano track, etc.). When you play the sequence, all of them will play simultaneously.
First, let’s make an empty track.
To select a new track:
1. Press Main to go back to Main Mode.
2. Press F4/Track+ to select Track 002 – (unused). Alternatively, use the Trk field.
Let’s create a new program for this track to use.
To create a new program:
1. Use the cursors to select the Pgm field, and then press Window.
2. In the Edit Program screen that appears, press F3/New.
3. In the New Program screen that appears, select Type, and set it to Keygroup. This indicates a keygroup
program, which is necessary to play the bass sound chromatically with the pads.
4. Press F5/Do It.
You are now using a keygroup program on your new track.
23
To load and edit a bass sound:
1. Press Browser to show the Browser, and use it to navigate to where your bass sounds are located, and load one
to the project’s sample pool. (You can look at this earlier section if you forgot how to do this!)
2. After loading a bass sample to the sample pool, don’t use Pad Assign like you did when creating a drum
program; keygroup programs are different.
Instead, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
3. In Program Edit Mode, press F2/Samples to show the first Samples tab.
4. Make sure Layer in the upper-left corner is set to 1. Select the Smpl field, and then set it to the bass sample you
just loaded to the sample pool. Because you’re working with a keygroup program instead of a drum program,
this sample is now playable across all pads.
Tip: On your MPC hardware, press the Pad Bank D button to switch to Pad Bank D and press Pad 13. You
should hear the bass sample played back with its original pitch. You can use the other pads to play your sample
chromatically.
Let’s add a second layer and set the layers’ velocity ranges so the bass will sound different when played at a higher
velocity (as a real bass would):
1. Press Browser to show the Browser, and select a different bass sample that sounds similar but a little bit
brighter, and load it to the project’s sample pool.
2. Return to Program Edit Mode, and in the first Samples tab, set Layer to 2, and set Smpl to the new bass
sample. Press a pad to hear both samples will sound at once. Maybe this new sound is interesting as it is, but
let’s make some quick edits to get as close as we can to a real-life bass sound.
3. Press F3/Pan Vel tab to show the panning and velocity parameters for each sample layer: S1–S4.
4. Set S1’s High setting to 80, and then do the same to set S2’s Low setting to 81. You can do this with Q-Link
Knobs 15 and 10 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the third column and second Q-Link knob in
the second column (MPC Studio), respectively.
Now when you press a pad, the lower velocities (0–80) will trigger the Layer 1 sample only, while higher velocities
(81–127) will trigger the Layer 2 sample only.
24
Let’s record that bass line now. Prepare your recording as described earlier, and record some bass notes. You can
edit your recording just like we’ve done earlier.
Once you’ve recorded it, let’s tweak the sound a bit in the Filter section.
1. In Program Edit Mode, press F4/Flt Env tab to show the filter and envelope parameters.
2. Set the Type to Low 4, a 4-pole low-pass filter by turning Q-Link Knob 13 (MPC Renaissance) or the first QLink knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
3. Turn Q-Link Knobs 14 and 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the second and third Q-Link knobs in the first row (MPC
Studio) to adjust the Cutoff or Reso (resonance) settings until your bass sample sounds good to you.
4. Turn Q-Link Knobs 1 and 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the first and fourth Q-Link knobs in the fourth row (MPC
Studio) to adjust the Amp Atk (attack) or Amp Rel (release) settings. These control the overall level characteristics
of the sound.
Do you want to add an effect? Do this in the Effects tab like you did earlier.
1. Select the Insert 1 slot, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
2. In the Select Effect screen that appears, select Reverb Medium and then press F4/Select to load it.
So far, we’ve created a simple drum sequence and a bass line to go with it. Repeat this process to create a second
sequence.
25
Recording an Audio Track
We’ve already created some MIDI tracks, so let’s record some actual audio for our next track:
1. Press Main to go back to Main Mode.
2. Press F2/Audio. 001 – Audio 001 will appear in the Trk field.
3. Connect a synthesizer or other line-level audio source to the XLR/1/4” (6.35 mm) input/inputs on your MPC
hardware’s rear panel, and set the Mic/Line selector to Line.
4. Set Input field to Input 1 or Input 1,2 (depending on your audio source).
5. Set Mon to AUTO—you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
6. Turn the Rec Gain knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in
the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
7. If Mute or Solo are on, press F5/Mute or F6/Solo so they are off. Also, press Q-Link Trigger until it is off (not
solidly lit or flashing).
8. Press Shift+F4/Rec Arm to record-enable the track.
9. Press Rec to record-arm the sequence.
10. To start recording, press Play or Play Start—then play your audio source! You should hear your existing
sequence playing in the background.
To stop recording, press Stop.
Record another audio track for your other sequence: Select the other sequence in Main Mode, and create another
audio track (Audio 002) to go with that sequence.
26
Creating a Song
This section explains how to make a song out of your sequences. Before starting, make sure that you have recorded
some sequences (which we described earlier).
To enter Song Mode, make sure playback is stopped, and then press Song.
In Song Mode, each of the sequences you’ve created in this project assigned to a pad. The sequence playlist is to
the left of the pads, showing the song’s structure.
As a song plays, it moves through each step of the sequence playlist. Each step contains a sequence you assigned.
Each step can be repeated, determined by the value in the Repeat column (the repeat icon; a value of 1 means the
sequence will play through only once). The Bars column on the right shows the length of that sequence.
Each step can be set to play its sequence at an independent tempo, determined by the value in the BPM column.
Important: Each sequence has its own tempo, while the project itself may use a different master tempo. The BPM value
for each sequence may be different from the master tempo. As long as playback is set to follow the master tempo, each
sequence’s individual tempo will be ignored. By default, each project is set to use the sequence tempo, which you set
back in the Creating a Drum Sequence chapter. We recommend pressing Shift+Tap Tempo (so that the top of the
screen shows Mst instead of Seq) and entering a master tempo to ensure all sequences use the same tempo.
To insert a step at the current position, press F6/Insert.
To delete the currently selected step, press F5/Delete.
To set which sequence plays for a step, select the step’s Sequence field, and then use the data dial or –/+
buttons to select a sequence.
To set how many times a sequence repeats, select the step’s Rpts field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to select a number.
Exporting the Song
Want to share your new song? Just export it first using the Audio Mixdown window in the MPC software. The Audio
Mixdown window lets you render and export either the current sequence or song as an audio file. In Song Mode, this
will export the entire song. In Main Mode, this will export the current sequence only.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn more about this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
27
Other Features Explained
This chapter describes various advanced features. For a fuller explanation of these features, please refer to their
corresponding sections in the Operation chapter.
Step Sequencer
You’ve already learned how to record note events on a track, but you can quickly enter note events in the Step
Sequencer by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum
machine.
To enter the Step Sequencer, press Step Seq.
Let’s create a sequence on a new track:
1. Select Trk and select an (unused) track.
2. Select Len and set a length for the track. If you select the minimum value, SEQ, the track will be however long
your sequence is.
Tip: This lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
3. Press F2/Bar– or F3/Bar+ to select the bar whose steps you want to create or edit. The bar number will appear
in the Bar field at the top of the screen.
4. Press F5/Pad– or F6/Pad+ to select the pad whose steps want to create or edit. The pad number will appear in
the Pad field at the top of the screen.
5. Press Play to start your sequence.
6. Each pad represents a step in the bar. If the pad already has note events on the selected track, the corresponding
pads (steps) will be lit with colors corresponding to their velocities.
To enter a note at a step, press an unlit pad. The pad will light up with a color corresponding to its velocity.
To delete the note from a step, press a lit pad. The pad will become unlit.
See Operation > Modes > Step Sequencer to learn more about this feature.
28
Drum Loops & Chop Mode
Modern music producers often use drum loops to add grit and nuance to programmed beats. This section explains
how to use Sample Edit Mode to work with drum loops.
Use the Browser to locate a drum loop, and then double-tap it to add it to the current program. The loop does not
have to match the tempo of anything in the project.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, press Sample Edit.
1. Use the Sample field at the top of the screen to select the loaded drum loop. You can scroll through all loaded
samples in the project.
2. Press F1/Trim/Chop to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. Select Chop Mode, which will let us cut the
drum loop into slices.
3. Set the Chop To field to Threshold, and then use the Threshold field to select a value. The lower the threshold,
the more slices will be created. Be sure to select a value so that every transient peak of the drum loop has a
corresponding a slice marker.
Tip: Each slice will be automatically assigned to a pad: Pad A01 plays Slice 1, Pad A02 plays Slice 2, etc. Press
each pad to play the slice with the same number.
Let’s use this chopped sample to create a new program in which each of these slices is an individual sample. We
can also automatically create corresponding note events to play back these slices sequentially.
1. Press and hold Shift and then press F4/Convert to screen to show the Convert or Assign Slices screen.
2. Set Convert To to New Program with New Samples.
3. Set Crop Samples to ON.
4. Set Create New Program to ON.
5. Set Create Events to ON.
6. Set Number Of Bars to the number of bars the entire sample should use in your program.
7. Press F5/Do It to proceed. Each slice will be assigned to a pad, and each pad will have a recorded note event in
the track. When you play that track, it will play each pad (each slice) in the original order.
8. Press Play and listen to how the drum loop matches your song tempo now.
29
You can also edit the note events of the drum loop slices—enter Main Mode to do this. A new track with the note
events playing their corresponding slices has been automatically created. Press Shift+F1/T.C. to use the Timing
Correct screen to quantize the note events so they fall on exact, even time intervals.
You can also rearrange the note events, thus creating a new playback order for the slices. You can also edit each
slice or sample in Program Edit Mode. You can add effects for slices or use the filter function to change the
frequency range of a selected slice. There are almost no limits to what you can do.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode to learn more about this feature.
30
Pad Muting & Track Muting
Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode let you silence different pads and tracks to see what the sequence sounds
like without those samples or parts.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, press Shift+Track Mute/Pad Mute.
1. Press Play to play the sequence.
2. Use the Program field to select your drum program.
3. Mute or unmute a pad by pressing it. The muted pad will be lit red. You can mute multiple pads at the same time.
See Operation > Modes > Pad Mute Mode to learn more about track mutes.
You can also mute entire tracks by using the similar Track Mute function.
To enter Track Mute Mode, press Track Mute.
1. Press Play to play the sequence.
2. Use the Sequence field to select the desired sequence.
3. Each pad is assigned to a track. Mute or unmute a track by pressing the corresponding pad. The pad will be lit
red. You can mute multiple tracks at the same time.
Tip: To mute a track only at precise note intervals (“quantizing” your mutes, essentially), press F4/Time Div to set
a musical timing value. Use the Note Value field to set the quantization value, and then press F4/Close to return to
the Track Mute screen. Now, when you press a pad in Track Mute Mode, the mute will occur precisely at the
beginning of the following time division (in this example, one bar). This lets you test musical combinations of
patterns—the preliminary stage to building a song structure.
See Operation > Modes > Track Mute Mode to learn more about track mutes.
31
Sampling (Recording)
This section describes recording new samples of your own, which you can use in your projects.
Important: To record any audio, you need to connect an audio source to your MPC hardware or to your computer’s
audio interface.
To open Sample Record Mode, press Shift+Sample Edit/Sample Rec.
1. Connect an audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware.
2. Make sure Input is set to In 1,2 (the inputs of your MPC hardware).
3. Turn the Rec Gain knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in
the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. Set the Threshold field to a fairly low level (e.g., -50 dB).
5. Press F6/Record to record-arm the sampler.
6. Play your audio source. The Sampler will start recording immediately when the input level reaches the threshold
value. Alternatively, press F6/Start to manually start recording.
7. To stop recording, press F6/Stop. The Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
In the Keep or Discard Sample window:
To assign the new sample to a program, use the Prg field.
To assign the sample to a pad in the program, select the Assign to Pad field, and then press the desired pad.
Alternatively, use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired pad number.
To confirm your selections, press F5/Keep.
To discard the recording and return to the previous screen, press F4/Discard.
To play the recording, press F2/Play.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Record Mode to learn more about this feature.
32
Sample Editing
You may need to edit your newly recorded samples using Sample Edit Mode.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, press Sample Edit.
In Sample Edit Mode:
To switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode, press F1/Trim/Chop. In this example, set it to Trim.
To set the sample’s start point, use Q-Link Knobs 1, 5, 9, and 13 (MPC Renaissance) or the first column of QLink knobs (MPC Studio) to adjust the start point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, use the Start field.
To set the sample’s end point, use Q-Link Knobs 2, 6, 10, and 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second column
of Q-Link knobs (MPC Studio) to adjust the end point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, use the
End field.
To hear your edits, press Pad 10 to play the sample from the start point to the end point.
Let’s apply some processing to the sample.
To open the Process Sample window, press F6/Process.
1. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired process in the Function field. Let’s select Pitch Shift to
change the overall pitch of your sample. This will transpose the sample without affecting its length.
2. To set the pitch shift amount, use the cursors to select the integer or decimal Pitch fields, and use the data
dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the value. Alternatively, use the numeric keypad (MPC Renaissance) or press and
hold Numeric and use the pads (MPC Studio) to enter a value.
3. To confirm your selections, tap Do It.
To cancel the process, tap Cancel.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode to learn more.
Recording Automation
Automating various parameters is a good way to add some motion and dynamism to your sequences.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn more about this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
33
Operation
This chapter explains the complete features and functions of your MPC hardware.
Navigating the MPC Hardware Screen
Below is some important information about using your MPC hardware controls to navigate what is shown in its screen.
The screen on your MPC hardware reflects what it is controlling in the software, but due to space and character
limitations, the hardware screen is slightly different (e.g., parameter names may be abbreviated, the layout may be
different or spread across multiple tabs, etc.).
Use the cursors to select any of the fields shown in the screen. You can also use the
up and down cursors to move through lists.
Turn the data dial or press the –/+ buttons to change the setting or value of the currently selected (highlighted) field
in the screen. You can also use these controls to move through lists.
If the selected field is a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to
confirm it. On the MPC Renaissance, this is the set of 12 buttons above the transport controls. On the MPC Studio,
press and hold Numeric, and then use the pads that are lit green.
When the Window button is lit, it means the selected field in the screen contains additional parameters in a subwindow. Press Window to access them.
When accessing the secondary functions of buttons on your MPC hardware, you can do this one of two ways: (1)
pressing and holding Shift and then pressing the desired button or (2) double-pressing the desired button. This
manual describes these operations using only the first option, but both are acceptable.
Almost every mode shown on the screen has 1–6 buttons at the bottom. Each of these buttons select a different tab
in that mode or perform a specific function in that mode.
In addition to the six buttons at the bottom of the screen, there are often additional ones you can use when you
press and hold Shift. Press and hold Shift to show the secondary buttons, and any of them, if desired. Release Shift
to return to the previous buttons.
While the MPC Renaissance has 16 Q-Link knobs, allowing direct access to all 16
parameters, the MPC Studio is equipped with 4 Q-Link knobs which need to be
assigned to the corresponding Q-Link knob column or row by turning the Scroll
knob above them. In modes where the screen shows a 4x4 array of parameters, you
will see an additional indicator on the top or left side of the array, indicating the
currently controlled column or row.
34
General Features
Programs
About Programs
Each track you create within a sequence is routed through a program. There are six types of programs, each of
which determines how the track sounds or what it is used for. A single project can hold up to 128 programs.
This chapter covers how to create each program type.
To learn about editing your programs to your preference, see the Modes > Program Edit Mode chapter.
A drum program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the settings
for each sample (i.e., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Drum programs are used mostly for
creating drum parts and quickly and easily assigning samples to pads. See Drum Programs for more information.
A keygroup program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Keygroup programs are used to play samples chromatically
with a MIDI keyboard or the MPC pads. See Keygroup Programs for more information.
A clip program uses several samples that can be looped (clips). Each clip can be assigned to a pad, which you can
press to trigger the clip according to a quantization setting. This lets you create intriguing, layered performances by
launching different combinations of clips together. See Clip Programs for more information.
A plugin program contains an instance of a plugin through which you can send your track’s MIDI data. See Plugin
Programs for more information.
A MIDI program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine. See
MIDI Programs for more information.
A CV program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device that uses control voltage (CV), like a
synth. See CV Programs for more information.
35
Drum Programs
A drum program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the settings
for each sample (i.e., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Drum programs are used mostly for
creating drum parts and quickly and easily assigning samples to pads.
To create a drum program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to Drum.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
To load a sample into a drum program:
1. Press Pad Assign. The pads will be shown in a 4x4 array in the screen.
2. Use the Program field to select the desired program.
3. Press F1/Sample so that the Sample tab is selected.
4. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
5. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired sample. Its name will appear in the pad in the screen.
Now, you can press that pad to play the assigned sample.
To clear the assigned sample from a selected pad, set it to the “minimum” value so the pad in the screen is blank.
To assign samples to additional pads, repeat Steps 4–5.
Alternatively, assign samples in a drum program in Program Edit Mode in one of these two ways:
Tip: On your MPC hardware, press the Pad Bank D button to switch to Pad Bank D and press Pad 13. You should
hear the bass sample played back with its original pitch. You can use the other pads to play your sample chromatically.
1. While using the program, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Press F2/Samples to show the first Samples tab.
3. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
4. Set Layer to the number of the desired layer: 1–4.
5. Set Smpl to the desired sample.
1. While using the program, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Press F2/Samples to show the second or third Samples tab. This lets you view the samples assigned to all four
layers of the current pad as well as the different settings of each layer.
3. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
4. Turn the first column of Q-Link Knobs to select the desired sample for Layer 1, 2, 3, or 4 (respectively).
Alternatively, use the S1–4 fields.
36
Keygroup Programs
A keygroup program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Keygroup programs are used to play samples chromatically
with a MIDI keyboard or the MPC pads.
To create a keygroup program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to Keygroup.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
To assign samples in a keygroup program, use one of these two methods:
Tips:
To create complex keygroup programs, you can add more keygroups (up to 128). This is useful when working with
multi-samples (e.g., when programming a real piano).
On your MPC hardware, press the Pad Bank D button to and press Pad 13. You should hear the sample played
back with its original pitch. You can use the other pads to play your sample chromatically.
Remember that a keygroup program offers up to 128 keygroups, and each keygroup can hold up to four samples
(Layers 1–4). This is a total of 512 samples.
1. While using the program, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Press F1/Master to show the Master tab.
3. Use the Kg Select field to select the keygroup to which you want to assign the sample. Alternatively, press a pad
that belongs to that keygroup.
4. Press F2/Samples to show the first Samples tab.
5. Set Layer to the number of the desired layer: 1–4.
6. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
7. Set Smpl to the desired sample.
1. While using the program, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Press F1/Master to show the Master tab.
3. Use the Kg Select field to select the keygroup to which you want to assign the sample. Alternatively, press a pad
that belongs to that keygroup.
4. Press F2/Samples to show the second or third Samples tab. This lets you view the samples assigned to all four
layers of the current pad as well as the different settings of each layer.
5. Press the pad to which you want to assign the sample.
6. Turn the first column of Q-Link Knobs to select the desired sample for Layer 1, 2, 3, or 4 (respectively).
Alternatively, use the S1–4 fields.
37
Clip Programs
A clip program uses several samples that can be looped (clips). Each clip can be assigned to a pad, which you can
press to trigger the clip according to a quantization setting. This lets you create intriguing, layered performances by
launching different combinations of clips together.
By default, the 16 pads are divided into four columns of four pads. Each column represents a mute group; when a
pad is playing a clip, all other pads in that same mute group are turned off. This enables you to launch a clip without
having to manually stop other clips that are similar. For instance, pressing Pad 2 may launch a bass clip. You could
then press Pad 6, which launches another bass clip and stops the clip on Pad 2. This way, you’ll never be playing
two bass clips simultaneously.
The four-columns pad configuration described above is just a default to make things easy (e.g., you could use the
first column for drum clips, the second for bass clips, the third for keyboard clips, and the fourth for vocal clips). You
can use Program Edit Mode to assign pads to any combination of mute groups you want.
To create a clip program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to Clip.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
To load a clip into a clip program:
1. While using the program, press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Press F2/Pad.
3. Press a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if any).
4. Set Sample to the desired clip.
To clear the assigned clip from a selected pad, repeat Step 4, but select <none>.
To assign clips to additional pads, repeat Steps 3–4.
38
Plugin Programs
A plugin program contains an instance of a plugin through which you can send your track’s MIDI data. This lets you
use the same instance of a plugin with multiple tracks (rather than load an instance of a plugin on every track, which
can be cumbersome and CPU-intensive).
To create a plugin program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to Plugin.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
To select the plugin that the program will use:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Plg, and use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
3. In the Select Plugin screen that appears, select a plugin.
Note: To select a plugin here, you must have already loaded it in the MPC software’s Plugin Manager. See the user
guide in the MPC software to learn more: click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
4. Press F4/Select to select the plugin or F3/Back to return to Main Mode without selecting a plugin.
To select a preset in your plugin (if any), select Plg, and press Window. In the list that appears, select the
desired preset and press F5/Select to select it or F4/Close to return to Main Mode.
To select the MIDI channel the program will use, use the Ch field. Use this setting when you are working with
a virtual instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To adjust the volume and panning of a track using the plugin program:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Set Mixer to Tracks.
3. Press F1/Level to view the velocity levels of all tracks or F2/Pan to view the panning of all tracks.
4. Select the field that corresponds to the track with the plugin program, and adjust the value. Alternatively, turn its
corresponding Q-Link knob. After you do this once, you can adjust the volume and panning of the plugin
program normally.
Important:
If you copy a sequence, the volume and pan values will be copied with that sequence. This is also true if you
move to a new sequence and put the same plugin program on a new track.
By default, some plugins do not support MIDI volume and pan. In this case, adjust volume levels and panning on
the plugin program.
39
MIDI Programs
A MIDI program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine.
To create a MIDI program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to Midi.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
There are five additional settings to configure for a MIDI program: the MIDI port (Port), program change message
(PC), MIDI channel (Ch), Most Significant Byte (Bank MSB), and Least Significant Byte (Bank LSB). See this section
to learn more.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the software’s Preferences (in the Edit Menu). See the user guide
in the MPC software to learn more: click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
To adjust the level and panning of a track using the plugin program:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Set Mixer to Tracks.
3. Press F1/Level to view the velocity levels of all tracks or F2/Pan to view the panning of all tracks.
4. Select the field that corresponds to the track with the MIDI program, and adjust the value. Alternatively, turn its
corresponding Q-Link knob. After you do this once, you can adjust the volume and panning of the MIDI program
normally.
Important:
If you copy a sequence, the volume and pan values will be copied with that sequence. This is also true if you
move to a new sequence and put the same plugin program on a new track.
40
CV Programs
A CV program lets you send your control voltage (CV) signals to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine
that uses CV.
To create a MIDI program:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Pgm, and press Window.
3. Press F3/New.
4. In the New Program screen that appears, set the Type field to CV.
5. Press F5/Do It to create the program or F4/Cancel to return to Main Mode without creating the program.
There are five additional settings to configure for a CV program: the note tracking (Note), the CV Port, the Gate Port,
the modulation wheel (Mod Wheel), and Velocity Port. See the user guide in the MPC software to learn more: click
the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
To adjust the level and panning of a track using the CV program:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Set Mixer to Tracks.
3. Press F1/Level to view the velocity levels of all tracks or F2/Pan to view the panning of all tracks.
4. Select the field that corresponds to the track with the CV program, and adjust the value. Alternatively, turn its
corresponding Q-Link knob. After you do this once, you can adjust the volume and panning of the CV program
normally.
Important: If you copy a sequence, the volume and pan values will be copied with that sequence. This is also
true if you move to a new sequence and put the same plugin program on a new track.
41
Saving
To save the project, press Shift+Browser/Save. If you have already saved the project, your changes will be saved.
If you have not saved the project yet, use the Save window in the software window to save the project.
Important: The MPC software window contains various settings to save a new project. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
Preferences
The Preferences screen contains many customizable elements of the software. Changes to the Preferences are
saved automatically.
Important: The Preferences window shown in the MPC software window contains even more settings you may want
to configure. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC
Help, and select MPC User Manual.
To open the Preferences, press Shift+Song/Other, and then press F1/Prefs.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
MidiCtrl
Press this button to enter MIDI Control Mode. See Modes > MIDI Control Mode to learn
more.
Auto button determines whether pressing Q-Link Trigger cycles through the automation states globally (Global) or
for the currently selected program only (Program). See General Features > Automation to learn more about this.
Number Of Taps determines how many times you have to press the Tap Tempo button before the new tempo is
recognized.
Pad Threshold determines how much force is required to strike the pads for them to trigger.
Pad Sensitivity determines how the pads respond to touch. At lower values, you need to use more force to generate
a high-velocity note. At higher values, it is easier to generate high-velocity notes, even if you do not use much force
while pressing a pad.
Pad Curve determines how striking the pads translates into velocity values. The A curve
is essentially linear, while the B, C, and D curves are exponential (see graphic here).
MIDI
Velocity
Footswitch 1 & Footswitch 2 determine how connected footswitches will work. These
options are available for MPC Renaissance only, not for MPC Studio, which does not
have footswitch inputs.
Applied
Force
42
Recording Bit Depth determines bit depth of the audio recorded from a sample.
Display Resolution is the display resolution in PPQN (pulses per quarter note) of pulse values in certain areas of the
operating system. Please note that this setting affects the display resolution, not the timing.
Program Change Target determines what an incoming MIDI program change message will change: nothing (Off), a
program (Program), a sequence (Sequence), or a track (Track).
43
Now & Locators
In some modes, there is a time counter at the top of the screen. This shows the current playhead position. You may
also see a thin white bar under it that spans the width of the screen, serving as a visual indicator of this position. (If the
Auto Record feature is on, Punch In or Seq Start will be shown next to the time. See below to learn about this.)
To jump to a specific location, use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
change the number. You can also use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
To move forward or backward a step, press the < or > button (MPC Renaissance) or the Step < or Step >
button (MPC Studio), respectively.
To move forward or backward a bar, press the << or >> button (MPC Renaissance) or the Bar << or Bar >>
button (MPC Studio), respectively.
You can also use the Locators screen to jump to another position in the current sequence, set time markers, or turn
the Auto Record feature on or off.
To open the Locators screen, press Locate (MPC Renaissance) or Go To (MPC Studio).
You can use the following fields and buttons in the Locators screen. Use the cursors to select each field, and then
use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric keypad
to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
GO TO determines where in your current sequence you want to jump.
To jump to a specific location, use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
change the number. You can also use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
To move forward or backward a step, press the < or > button (MPC Renaissance) or the Step < or Step >
button (MPC Studio), respectively.
To move forward or backward a bar, press the << or >> button (MPC Renaissance) or the Bar << or Bar >>
button (MPC Studio), respectively.
44
Auto Rec determines how the Auto Record feature will function.
To set how Auto Record works, use this field to select an option:
•
Off: Auto Record is disabled.
•
Punch In: You can auto-record using punch-in and punch-out markers, enabling you to record over the
specified length of time in the track between them. While recording, the entire sequence will play, but
you will record over only the area between the Punch In and Punch Out markers. Any part of the
sequence before the Punch In marker or after the Punch Out marker will remain untouched, even if you
perform over it during recording.
To set the Punch In and Punch Out markers, select Auto Rec and press Window. Use the fields
and buttons in the screen that appears:
The left and right sets of three numeric fields determine the locations of Punch In and Punch Out
markers (respectively).
F2/Punch In sets the Punch In marker at the current location (as long as it is before the Punch
Out marker).
F5/Punch Out sets the Punch Out marker at the current location (as long as it is after the Punch
In marker).
F4/Back returns to the previous screen.
•
Seq Start: After you record-arm the track and start playback, you will start recording once the sequence
loops back to its start. This is essentially a punch-in feature for the entire track, enabling you to start
playing a record-armed track while allowing more time than the usual count-in to prepare for the actual
recording to start.
1–6 are the locations of time markers. You can use these to jump automatically to precise locations in a sequence.
To manually enter a time marker location, use each field.
To set a time marker at the current location (the GO TO field), select one of its three fields, and then press
F2/Capture.
To jump to a time marker, select one of its three fields, and press F5/Go. Alternatively, on MPC Renaissance,
you can press and hold Locate and then press a number (1–6) on the numeric keypad (you can do this even
while not in the Locators screen).
F2/Capture sets a time marker at the current location (shown in the GO TO field).
F4/Close returns to the previous screen.
F5/Go jumps to the currently selected time marker (1–6) and returns to the previous screen.
45
Timing Correct/T.C.
The Timing Correct feature (abbreviated TC) includes settings to help quantize the note events in a track. This is
available in Main Mode and the Step Sequencer.
Note: Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode include a similar Timing Correct feature in each mode, but it is different
from the feature described here. See Modes > Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode to learn about those settings.
To open the Timing Correct settings:
In Main Mode, press Shift+F1/T.C.
In the Step Sequencer, press F1/T.C.
You can use the following fields and buttons in the Timing Correct screen. Use the cursors to select each field, and
then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric
keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Type determines how timing corrections are applied.
•
Start: The entire note event will be nudged forward or backward so the start point aligns with the closest
time division marker in the grid.
•
End: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to align with the closest time division
marker in the grid. The start points will remain untouched.
•
Length: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened so that each event’s length is a multiple
of the time division, regardless of where it is in the grid. The start points will remain untouched.
•
Legato: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to create a long, unbroken phrase from
the first note event’s start point to the last note event’s end point. Each note event will sustain until another
note event starts. If multiple note events start at the same time (and are not the last note events), their
lengths will become identical. Selecting Legato disables all other options in this window.
Without legato applied.
With legato applied.
46
Time Div is the quantization value. Note events will “snap” to these time divisions on the grid. The T indicates a
triplet-based value.
To set the quantization value, use this field. Alternatively, if you are not in the Timing Correct screen, press
and hold Note Repeat and press one of the six buttons under the screen; F1–F5 sets the note value, and F6/(3)
determines whether it is a standard value or triplet-based value.
Strength determines how strictly notes will be quantized (i.e., shifted toward the quantize value): 0–100%. Lower
values move notes a little bit towards the closest quantize value, resulting in a less mechanical feel than a strict
quantization (a higher value).
To set the quantization strength, use this field.
Swing determines the amount of swing: 50–75%. Swing lets you “shuffle” your beats, from subtle to extreme. 50%
corresponds to no swing (“straight”) and 75% corresponds to the maximum amount.
To set the amount of swing, use this field.
Shift Timing is an offset for the events that will be time-corrected. The affected events will be shifted by this amount:
-48 to 48 ticks of the time counter.
To off-set the time-corrected notes, use this field.
Window determines how many notes around each beat (Time Div) will be quantized. Any notes outside this range
will not be quantized; notes inside will. This value is measured as a percentage: 0–100%.
To set the quantization window, use this field.
Events determines the target range for the time correction:
•
All: Time correction will be applied to all note events in the currently selected track.
•
Selected: Time correction will be applied to only the selected note events in the currently selected track. (Use
the grid in the MPC software window to do this.)
•
Range: Time correction will be applied to note events within a certain span of time. You can also set whether
it applies to all notes within that timespan or specific note values only.
From is the start of the range.
To is the end of the range.
Notes are the specific note values that you want to time-correct within the range. Press the corresponding
pads to select or deselect the notes.
F3/All Trks applies the Timing Correct settings to all tracks at the same time.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without applying your changes.
F5/Do It applies the time corrections you entered and returns to the previous screen.
47
Click/Metronome
The Click/Metrome screen contains all settings regarding the metronome (click track). These settings are accessible
from within Main Mode only, though they apply to all modes (globally).
To open the metronome settings, press Main to enter Main Mode, and then press Shift+F2/Click.
You can use the following fields and buttons in the Click/Metronome screen. Use the cursors to select each field,
and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric
keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Count-In determines if the metronome counts before recording and playback.
To set how the metronome count-in works, use this field to select an option:
•
Off disables the metronome pre-count.
•
Record enables the pre-count during recording only.
•
Record + Play enables pre-count in both Record and Playback Modes.
Metronome determines if/when the metronome is enabled:
To set when the metronome is enabled, use this field to select an option:
•
Off disables the metronome.
•
Play enables the metronome sound during playback only.
•
Record enables the metronome sound during recording only.
•
Record + Play enables the metronome to sound during recording and playing.
Rate is the time division of the metronome click: 1/4, 1/4T, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/16, 1/16T, 1/32 or 1/32T. T indicates a
triplet-based time division.
To set the metronome rate, use this field.
Sound is the sound that occurs during each beat of the metronome: Sidestick 1, Sidestick 2, Clap, Metroclick,
Shake, Tambourine, or MPC Click.
To set the metronome sound, use this field.
Volume is the volume of the metronome.
To set the metronome volume, use this field.
48
Automation
You can set the automation for programs and audio tracks to be “written,” “read,” or disabled entirely. You can do
this globally or for individual programs and audio tracks.
Global
Changing the global automation state will change the automation state for all programs in your project.
To change the global automation state, press Q-Link Trigger when it is set to Global in the Preferences screen
(see this section to learn how to do this).
The Q-Link Trigger button will cycle through its three states:
•
When off, automation data will be ignored. If you have already recorded or entered automation, this will
switch between Read (solidly lit) and Write (flashing) only, but you can override this and turn it off by
pressing and holding Shift while pressing the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
•
When solidly lit (Read), automation data will be read but not recorded. (Think of this as a protective
feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
•
When flashing (Write), automation can be recorded and will overwrite any existing automation. (Make
sure not to touch the Q-Link knobs accidentally while you are recording.)
To set Q-Link Trigger to control global automation, press Shift+Song/Other (which will enter MIDI Control
Mode), press F1/Prefs to show the Preferences screen, and set Auto button to Global.
Programs & Audio Tracks
You can also set the automation for each program or audio track. Program automation is available for all program
types except MIDI programs.
Note: Remember that changing the global automation state will change the automation state for all programs in your
project; if they were originally different, all of them will then match the global automation state.
To change the automation state of a program or audio track, first select the MIDI track using the desired
program or select the desired audio track. After that, press Q-Link Trigger when it is set to Program in the
Preferences screen (see this section to learn how to do this).
Alternatively, do the following:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode or Step Seq to enter the Step Sequencer.
2. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
3. Press Window.
4. Use the cursors to select Automation. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change its automation state.
49
You can set each program or audio track to one of three automation states:
•
When off (x), the program or audio track will ignore automation data.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
•
When set to Read (R), the program or audio track will read automation data but will not record any
additional automation over it. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your
automation while recording.)
•
When set to Write (W), the program or audio track can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs
assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
To set Q-Link Trigger to control automation for a program or audio track, press Shift+Song/Other (which will
enter MIDI Control Mode), press F1/Prefs to show the Preferences screen, and set Auto button to Program.
16 Level
16 Level temporarily copies the samples of one pad to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number
as the initial pad, but a selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (i.e.,
Pad 1 is the minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them.
To activate or deactivate 16 Level:
1. Press 16 Level.
2. Use the fields in the 16 Levels screen that appears:
•
Active determines whether 16 Level is activated (ON) or not (OFF).
•
Pad is the pad that will be copied to all 16 of them. (You can simply press the pad to select it, but Active
must be set to OFF first.)
•
Type is the parameter that will vary in value across all 16 pads: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack, or
Decay.
If you select Tune, use the Original Pad field to select which you pad you want to use the original pitch
of the sample/samples. Alternatively, hold Shift and press the desired pad.
When Type is set to Layer, pads with multiple samples will play back each layer according to the
Velocity Start and Velocity End settings for each layer.
3. Press F5/Close to the previous screen.
50
Pad Assign
Pad Assign enables you to assign samples and specific colors to your pads in each program.
To use Pad Assign:
1. Press Pad Assign.
2. Use the fields in the screen that appears:
Program is the currently selected program whose pads are shown in the 16 fields below.
Style determines how the pad lights will display:
•
OFF: The pads will be unlit whether you are playing them or not.
•
VELO: The pads will be unlit while you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light
with colors according to the velocity: red indicates a high velocity, yellow indicates a low velocity.
•
FIXED: The pads will be lit with their assigned colors whether you are playing them or not.
•
OFF->V: The pads will be unlit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light
with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
•
DIM->V: The pads will be dimly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will
light with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
•
BRI->V: The pads will be brightly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will
light with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
Pad determines whether you are setting the color for one pad (SINGLE) or all pads (ALL).
The pads are shown in a 4x4 array with the names of their assigned samples or their colors, depending on
the tab selected at the bottom of the screen.
To view more pads, use the Pad Bank buttons.
To assign samples to the pads, press F1/Sample to select the Sample tab. Use the field in each pad
to select a sample from your project’s sample pool. You can also select a pad by pressing it.
To assign colors to the pads, press one of the F2–F5 buttons to select the corresponding color. Press
each pad to assign or un-assign that color.
F6/>Default makes the current pad color settings the defaults for all programs on the same type (e.g., drum
programs, keygroup programs, etc.). In the screen that appears, press F4/Do it to confirm your choice or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving the settings as defaults.
3. Press a mode button to enter any other mode.
51
Pad Copy
You can use the Pad Copy function to copy the samples and parameters from one pad to another.
To copy one pad to another:
1. Press and hold Shift+Pad Assign/Pad Copy.
2. In the Copy Pad window that appears, use the From Pad field to select the “source” pad. Alternatively, press
the “source” pad (when this field is selected).
3. Use the cursors to select the To Pads field, and then press the “destination” pads.
4. Press F5/Do It to continue. The samples and parameters will be copied automatically from the source pad to the
destination pad/pads.
Alternatively, press F4/Close to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
52
Erase
The Erase function erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence.
To use the Erase function:
1. Press Erase.
2. Use the fields in the screen that appears:
Sequence determines the sequence containing the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely).
Track determines the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely).
Time and To define the time range of the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely). Time is
the start of the time range, and To is the end.
Erase determines what types of events you will erase:
•
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and reset all of its settings.
•
Automation erases only automation from the designated time range. Use the Parameter field to
select what type of automation to erase, or select All to erase all automation from the designated
time range.
•
Note erases only specific pad events from the designated time range. Press each pad (in each bank)
to select or deselect its notes, which will appear in the Notes field below.
•
Except Note erases everything except pad events from the designated time range. Press each pad
(in each bank) to select or deselect its notes, which will appear in the Notes field below.
3. Press F5/Do It to erase the events, or press F4/Back to return to the previous screen without erasing anything.
53
Edit Sequence
You can use the Edit Sequence screen to make changes to your currently selected sequence. These functions are
described below. All options in the screen will work for MIDI tracks, but some of them will not work for audio tracks.
To enter the Edit Sequence screen, press Seq Edit.
To select an editing function, press the corresponding pad (Pad 1–8) or press the corresponding button on the
numeric keypad.
To exit the screen, press F4/Back to return to Main Mode, or press another mode button.
In the screen for each editing function, use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to change the parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press
Enter to confirm it.
The Insert Blank Bars function adds empty bars to a sequence at a specified point.
Sequence determines the sequence to which you want to add empty bars.
Number Of Bars determines how many empty bars you will add.
Time Sig determines the time signature of the empty bars (one field for the number of beats, one field for the
note value).
Before Bar is the bar before which the empty ones will be inserted.
F5/Do It inserts the bars.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
The Delete Bars function removes a range of bars from a sequence.
Sequence determines the sequence containing the track whose bars you want to delete.
First Bar and Last Bar define the range of bars in the track whose events you want to delete. First Bar is the
start of the range, and Last Bar is the end.
F5/Do It deletes the bars.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
54
The Copy Bars function copies a range of bars from a sequence and adds them to another at a specified point.
The first Sequence field is the “source” sequence whose bars you want to copy.
First Bar and Last Bar define the range of bars you want to copy in the source sequence. First Bar is the start
of the range, and Last Bar is the end.
The second Sequence field is the “destination” sequence where the source sequence bars will be copied.
After Bar is the bar after which the new ones will be inserted.
Copies determines how many instances of the copied bars you will add.
F4/Replace overwrites the destination sequence.
F5/Merge adds the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
F3/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
The Copy Events function copies the content of a track from a sequence and adds them to a track in another
sequence at a specified point.
The first Sequence field is the “source” sequence containing the track whose content you want to copy.
The first Track field is the “source” track whose content you want to copy.
The Pads or Notes field lets you select specific events to copy. Press the pads to select the pads or notes to
copy from.
Time and To define the time range of the track whose content you want to copy. Time is the start of the time
range, and To is the end.
The second Sequence field is the “destination” sequence containing the track where the source track’s content
will be copied.
The second Track field is the “destination” track where the source track’s content will be copied.
Time is the location in the sequence where the content will be copied.
Copies determines how many instances of the copied content you will add.
The lower-right field determines what events will be copied (available for MIDI tracks only):
•
All Events copies the notes in the time range determined by the Time and To fields above.
•
Only Selected copies only the currently selected events.
F4/Replace overwrites the destination sequence.
F5/Merge adds the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
F3/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
55
The Copy a Sequence function copies the contents of one sequence to another.
Copy Contents of Sequence is the “source” whose events you want to copy.
Over Contents of Sequence is the “destination” sequence where the source sequence will be copied.
F5/Do It copies the sequence.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
The Transpose function transposes a range of events on a track in a sequence. The events within that range will
shift accordingly in the Grid View. This option is available for MIDI tracks only.
Sequence determines the sequence containing the track whose events you want to transpose.
Track determines the track whose events you want to transpose.
Time and To define the time range of the track whose events you want to transpose. Time is the start of the time
range, and To is the end.
For drum programs:
Change Pad is the “source” pad (whose events you want to transpose).
To Pad is the “destination” pad (where the events will be placed).
For keygroup programs, plugin programs, and MIDI programs:
Range consists of two fields that define the range of notes of the events you want to transpose. Note events
within this range will be transposed, while note events outside of this range will remain unchanged.
Transpose determines how many semitones up or down you want to transpose the note events.
F5/Do It tranposes the events.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
56
The Erase function erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence.
Sequence determines the sequence containing the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely).
Track determines the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely).
Time and To define the time range of the track whose events you want to erase (partially or entirely). Time is the
start of the time range, and To is the end.
Erase determines what types of events you will erase:
•
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and reset all of its settings.
•
Automation erases only automation from the designated time range. Use the Parameter field to select
what type of automation to erase, or select All to erase all automation from the designated time range.
•
Note erases only specific pad events from the designated time range. Press each pad (in each bank) to
select or deselect its notes, which will appear in the Notes field below.
•
Except Note erases everything except pad events from the designated time range. Press each pad (in
each bank) to select or deselect its notes, which will appear in the Notes field below.
F5/Do It erases the events.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
The Copy Track function copies the contents of one track to another within the same sequence.
The first Track field is the “source” track whose content you want to copy.
The second Track field is the “destination” track where the source track’s content will be copied.
F5/Do It copies the track.
F4/Back returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
57
Effects
You can apply various effects to the pads, keygroups, audio tracks, programs, submixes, and master outputs, using
insert and send/return effects. This chapter can help you get a good overall understanding of how the effects work.
See Appendix > Effects & Parameters for a list of all available effects (with a brief description of each) and their
editable parameters.
Overview
In a program, each pad or keygroup can have up to four insert effects applied to it. See Insert Effects > Pads or
Keygroups to learn more about this.
An entire program or audio track can also have up to four insert effects applied to it, as well. See Insert Effects >
Programs or Audio Tracks to learn more about this.
For even further flexibility, each submix can have up to four insert effects applied to it. You can route pads,
keygroups, audio tracks, or programs to a submix, which is then routed to a master output. See Insert Effects >
Submixes to learn more about this.
Additionally, each pad, keygroup, audio track, program, and submix can each be sent to (up to) four return
channels, each of which can have up to four insert effects of their own. Their audio will be routed through the insert
effects on those returns, and the processed audio will be sent to a master output. See Send/Return Effects to learn
more about this.
Finally, you can apply up to four insert effects to each master output (a stereo pair of channels: Outputs 1/2,
Outputs 3/4, etc.). See Insert Effects > Master Outputs to learn more about this.
When you create an audio mixdown of a sequence or song, you can choose whether or not master insert effects are
included or send/return effects are included, depending on what you are mixing down:
If you are creating an audio mixdown of a pair of master outputs, you can choose whether or not master insert
effects will be included in the mixdown.
If you are creating an audio mixdown of separate programs or exploded tracks, you can choose whether or
not send/return effects will be included in the mixdown.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn about this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select
MPC User Manual.
There are two other modes that handle effects differently:
•
Sample Record Mode can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it.
This means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about this in the Modes >
Sample Record Mode chapter.
•
Similarly, the Looper can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it. This
means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about this in the Modes >
Looper chapter.
58
When viewing effect slots (empty or loaded), you will see either all four slots at once or one slot at a time across four tabs:
To load an effect to a slot or to change a slot’s loaded effect, use the cursors to select the field for that insert
slot, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to enter the Select Effect screen (described below).
To edit the parameters of a loaded effect, use the cursors to select the field for that insert slot, and then press
Window to enter the effect’s parameter screen (described below).
To clear the insert slot, load an effect as described above, but select the <none> option.
To enable or disable an effect, turn its corresponding Q-Link knob while viewing an Insert tab in the Pad Mixer
or Channel Mixer.
To enable or disable all four effect slots, use the cursors to select Inserts in the upper-right corner (if it is shown),
and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select On or Off (respectively).
When selecting an effect, you will see the Select Effect screen:
To move through the list, use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
To load an effect, press F4/Select.
To return to the previous screen without loading an effect, press F3/Back.
59
When editing an effect, you will see this screen:
To adjust a parameter, use the cursors to select its field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change
it. Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob.
To select another page of parameters, use the cursors to select Params in the upper-right corner, and then
use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change which parameters you are viewing.
To enable or disable the effect, press F6/On/Off.
To return to the previous screen, press F4/Close.
60
Insert Effects
This section describes the different ways to load insert effects to pads, keygroups, audio tracks, programs, submixes,
and master outputs.
Pads
You can load up to four insert effects to each pad in a drum program or clip program. You can do this in Program Edit
Mode or the Pad Mixer.
Tip: When using pad insert effects, they will be applied to the selected pad only. This means that you could apply
unique combinations of effects to each pad within a program. If you want to apply the same effect to all pads, do this
with a program insert effect (see Insert Effects > Programs).
To load a pad insert effect in Program Edit Mode:
1. Press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
3. Press the desired pad to select it.
4. Press F6/Effects.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot.
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
To load a pad insert effect in the Pad Mixer:
1. Press Prog Mix to enter the Pad Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
Alternatively, use the cursors to select Track, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired track—
the program it uses will be selected automatically.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Press the desired pad to select it, or use the cursors to select its field.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
61
Keygroups
You can load up to four insert effects to each keygroup in a keygroup program. You can do this in Program Edit
Mode or the Pad Mixer.
Important: When using keygroup insert effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if you
load insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that range as well.
To load a keygroup insert effect in Program Edit Mode:
1. Press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
3. Press a pad to select the keygroup it belongs to, or press F1/Master and then use the Kg Select field.
4. Press F6/Effects.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot.
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
To load a keygroup insert effect in the Pad Mixer:
1. Press Prog Mix to enter the Pad Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
Alternatively, use the cursors to select Track, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired track—
the program it uses will be selected automatically.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Press a pad to select the keygroup it belongs to, or use the cursors to select its field.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
62
Audio Tracks
You can load up to four insert effects to each audio track. You can do this in Main Mode and the Channel Mixer.
To load an audio track insert effect in Main Mode:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Press F2/Audio to view your audio tracks in Main Mode.
3. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the desired
audio track. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
4. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
5. Press Window.
6. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot.
7. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
To load an audio track insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Audio Tracks.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired audio track.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
63
Programs
You can load up to four insert effects to each program. You can do this in Main Mode, the Step Sequencer, and the
Channel Mixer. In Main Mode, you can load insert effects for drum, keygroup, clip, and plugin programs only. In the
Channel Mixer, you can load insert effects for drum, keygroup, or clip programs only.
To load a program insert effect in Main Mode:
Note: In Main Mode, you can load insert effects for drum, keygroup, clip, or plugin programs. MIDI and CV programs
do not use insert effects.
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Press F1/Midi to view your MIDI tracks in Main Mode.
3. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the track
with the desired program. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
4. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
5. Press Window.
6. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot.
7. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
64
To load a program insert effect in the Step Sequencer:
Note: In the Step Sequencer, you can load insert effects for drum, keygroup, clip, or plugin programs. MIDI and CV
programs do not use insert effects.
1. Press Step Seq to enter the Step Sequencer. (If you cannot enter it because you are viewing audio tracks, press
Main and then press F1/Midi to view MIDI tracks first.)
2. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the track
with the desired program. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
3. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
4. Press Window.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot.
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
To load a program insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
Note: In the Channel Mixer, you can load insert effects for drum, keygroup, or clip programs—not plugin programs.
MIDI and CV programs do not use insert effects.
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Programs.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired program.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
65
Submixes
You can load up to four insert effects to each submix. You can do this in the Channel Mixer only.
To load a submix insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Submixes.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired submix.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
66
Master Outputs
You can load up to four insert effects to each master output (a stereo pair of channels: Outputs 1/2, Outputs 3/4,
etc.). You can do this in the Channel Mixer or in the Effects screen.
To load a master insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Outputs.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired master output.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
To load a master insert effect in the Effects screen:
1. Press Shift+Seq Edit/Effects to enter Effects screen.
2. Use the cursors to select Outputs, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired master output.
3. Use the cursors to select the desired insert slot (Insert 1–4).
4. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
67
Send/Return Effects
Send/return effects work in the following way:
1. A pad, keygroup, audio track, program, or submix sends its audio to a return at a designated send level.
2. That audio is processed by the effects on the return. Each return can have up to four insert effects loaded and
activated.
3. The processed audio is sent to a pair of master outputs (stereo) or a single master output (mono).
You can load send/return effects and set return levels only in the Channel Mixer, described below. The rest of this section
describes the different ways to set the desired send levels for pads, keygroups, audio tracks, programs, or submixes.
To load a send/return effect to a return:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Returns.
3. Press F5/Insert to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired return channel.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to open the Select Effect screen to select and load an effect.
Turn the Q-Link knobs to turn their corresponding effects on or off.
To set the return level:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Returns.
3. Press F1/Level to select the desired insert slot.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired return channel.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to set the return level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to set the return level for each insert slot.
68
Pads
You can set the send levels for pads in Program Edit Mode or the Pad Mixer.
To set the send levels for a pad in Program Edit Mode:
1. Press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
3. Press the desired pad to select it.
4. Press F6/Effects.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired send level (Send 1–4).
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (4, 8, 12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the fourth column of
Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio) to adjust the level immediately for each send channel.
To set the send levels for a pad in the Pad Mixer:
1. Press Prog Mix to enter the Pad Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
Alternatively, use the cursors to select Track, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired track—
the program it uses will be selected automatically.
3. Press F4/Send to select the desired send channel.
4. Press a pad to select it, or use the cursors to select its field.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to adjust the send level immediately for each pad.
69
Keygroups
You can set the send levels for keygroups in Program Edit Mode or the Pad Mixer.
To set the send levels for a keygroup in Program Edit Mode:
1. Press Prog Edit to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
3. Press the desired pad to select the keygroup it belongs to, or press F1/Master and then use the Kg Select field.
4. Press F6/Effects.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired send level (Send 1–4).
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (4, 8, 12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the fourth column of
Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio) to adjust the level immediately for each send channel.
To set the send levels for a keygroup in the Pad Mixer:
1. Press Prog Mix to enter the Pad Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Program, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired program.
Alternatively, use the cursors to select Track, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired track—
the program it uses will be selected automatically.
3. Press F4/Send to select the desired send channel.
4. Press a pad to select the keygroup it belongs to, or use the cursors to select its field.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to adjust the send level immediately for each keygroup.
70
Audio Tracks
You can set the send levels for audio tracks in Main Mode or the Channel Mixer.
To load an audio track insert effect in Main Mode:
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Press F2/Audio to view your audio tracks in Main Mode.
3. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the desired
audio track. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
4. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
5. Press Window.
6. Use the cursors to select the desired send channel (Send1–4).
7. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
To load an audio track insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Audio Tracks.
3. Press F4/Send to select the desired send channel.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired audio track.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to adjust the send level immediately for each audio track.
71
Programs
You can set the send levels for programs in Main Mode, the Step Sequencer, or the Channel Mixer.
To set the send levels for a program in Main Mode:
Note: In Main Mode, you can set send levels for drum, keygroup, clip, or plugin programs. MIDI and CV programs do
not use send/return effects.
1. Press Main to enter Main Mode.
2. Press F1/Midi to view your MIDI tracks in Main Mode.
3. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the track
with the desired program. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
4. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
5. Press Window.
6. Use the cursors to select the desired send channel (Send1–4).
7. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
72
To set the send levels for a program in the Step Sequencer:
Note: In the Step Sequencer, you can set send levels for drum, keygroup, clip, or plugin programs. MIDI and CV
programs do not use send/return effects.
1. Press Step Seq to enter the Step Sequencer. (If you cannot enter it because you are viewing audio tracks, press
Main and then press F1/Midi to view MIDI tracks first.)
2. Use the cursors to select Trk, and then use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric keypad to select the track
with the desired program. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
3. Use the cursors to select the parameter in the lower-right corner. This varies depending on the last parameter
you adjusted in its sub-window.
4. Press Window.
5. Use the cursors to select the desired send channel (Send1–4).
6. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
To set the send levels for a program in the Channel Mixer:
Note: In the Channel Mixer, you can set send levels for drum, keygroup, clip, or plugin programs. MIDI and CV
programs do not use send/return effects.
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Programs.
3. Press F4/Send to select the desired send channel.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired program.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to adjust the send level immediately for each program.
73
Submixes
You can set the send levels for submixes in the Channel Mixer only.
To set the send levels for a submix:
1. Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. Use the cursors to select Mixer, and turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Submixes.
3. Press F4/Send to select the desired send channel.
4. Use the cursors to select the corresponding field for the desired submix.
5. Turn the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the send level.
Alternatively, turn the corresponding Q-Link knob to adjust the send level immediately for each submix.
74
Audio Mixdown
The Audio Mixdown window lets you render and export either the current sequence or song as an audio file. In Song
Mode, this will export the entire song. In Main Mode, this will export the current sequence only.
The Audio Mixdown window is shown in the MPC software window. To see the user guide in the MPC software and
learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
75
Modes
The MPC hardware is always controlling one of several modes. This chapter describes the various features and
functions of each one.
Important: The Prog Mix button on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Pad Mixer in the MPC software.
Similarly, Track Mix (or Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix) on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Channel Mixer in
the MPC software. This is due to the functionality changing as the software has evolved.
Main Mode
Press Main.
Browser
Press Browser.
Program Edit Mode
Press Prog Edit.
Sample Edit Mode
Press Sample Edit.
Pad Mixer
Press Prog Mix.
Channel Mixer
Press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix.
Step Sequencer
Press Step Seq.
List Editor
Press Shift+Step Seq. (The description of this mode is in Addenda >
Updates in MPC 2.1 > New Features > List Editor. This feature has been
available since earlier releases of the MPC software but not documented for
use with MPC Renaissance or MPC Studio until recently.)
Sample Record Mode
Press Shift+Sample Edit/Sample Rec.
Looper
Press Shift+Sample Edit/Sample Rec, and then press F1/Sampler.
Pad Mute Mode
Press Shift+Track Mute/Pad Mute.
Track Mute Mode
Press Track Mute.
Next Sequence Mode
Press Next Seq.
Song Mode
Press Song.
Q-Link Edit Mode
Press Shift+Prog Edit/Q-Link.
MIDI Control Mode
Press Shift+Song/Other.
76
Main Mode
Main Mode gives you an overview of the most-used functions.
To enter Main Mode, press Main.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Some information shown on this screen is common to both MIDI tracks and audio tracks (described below), while
other information is used for MIDI tracks only (see MIDI Tracks) or audio tracks only (see Audio Tracks).
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. (If the Auto Record
feature is on, Punch In or Seq Start will be shown next to the time.) See General Features > Now & Locators to
learn about this.
Seq is the current sequence number and its name.
To select a sequence, use this field.
To edit the sequence, select this field and then press Window. Use the fields in the Edit Current Sequence
screen that appears:
•
F2/Clear clears all events from the sequence and resets all of its settings. Press F4/Clear to continue or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/Double immediately doubles the sequence in length and copies all events from the first half to the
second half.
•
F4/Copy copies the contents of one sequence to another. Copy Contents of Sequence is the “source”
whose events you want to copy. Over Contents of Sequence is the “destination” sequence where the
source sequence will be copied. Select each field, and then use the numeric keypad, data dial, or –/+
buttons to select a sequence. Press F5/Do It to continue or F4/Back to return to the previous screen.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
BPM is the tempo of the sequence.
To set the tempo, press Tap Tempo in time with the desired tempo. Alternatively, use this integer or decimal
field.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (seq) or a master tempo (mst), press Shift+Tap Tempo.
Alternatively, select seq/mst, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
Bars is the length of the sequence in bars.
To set the number of bars, use this field.
77
Loop determines whether or not the sequence (or a part of it) will loop.
To enable or disable looping, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
To set the start point and end point of loop, select this field, and then press Window. In the Loop Measures
screen that appears:
First Bar is the first bar of the loop.
Last Bar is the last bar of the loop.
Number of Bars is the total number of bars in the sequence.
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
The level meter in the upper-right corner shows the current volume level of the master mix.
MIDI Tracks
These are the buttons under the screen for MIDI tracks:
F1
Midi
Press this button to view your MIDI tracks in Main Mode.
F2
Audio
Press this button to view your audio tracks in Main Mode.
F3
Track–
Press this button to select the previous track.
F4
Track+
Press this button to select the next track.
F5
Mute
Press this button to mute the current track.
F6
Solo
Press this button to solo the current track.
Shift+F1
T.C.
Press these buttons to open the Timing Correct/T.C. screen, which contains various
settings to help quantize the note events in your sequence. See General Features >
Timing Correct/T.C. to learn about this.
Shift+F2
Click
Press these buttons to open the Click/Metronome screen, which contains all settings
regarding the metronome (click track). See General Features > Click/Metronome to learn
about this.
Tran is the transposition (in semitones) of the entire sequence: -24 to +24. Off indicates no transposition (0 semitones).
To set the transposition, use this field.
The In and Out boxes show that your MPC hardware is receiving or sending (respectively) MIDI messages from or to
your computer.
16 track indicators are arranged in a 4x4 grid of dots or squares next to the In and Out boxes. Dots indicate
empty/unused tracks. Solid squares indicate used tracks. The outlined square indicates the currently selected track.
To select a track, use the Trk field. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
Trk is the current track number and its name.
To select a track, use the Trk field. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
To edit the track, select this field, and then press Window. In the Edit Current Track screen that appears:
•
F2/Clear clears all events from the track and resets all of its settings. Press F4/OK to continue or F3/Cancel
to return to the previous screen.
78
•
F3/Explode immediately splits the current track into multiple tracks—one for each distinct pad or note
(pitch, not event). The current track will also remain present and intact, while each track created from it is
labeled with the track name and pad name or number.
•
F4/Copy copies the contents of one track to another. Copy Contents of Track is the “source” track
whose events you want to copy. Over Contents of Track is the “destination” track where the source
track will be copied. Set each field to the desired track. Press F5/Do It to continue or F4/Back to return
to the previous screen.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
Length determines how long the track is in beats. If you select the minimum value, Seq (or 0), the track will be the
exact same length as its sequence.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
To set the track length, use this field.
Type is the type of program through which the track is being routed. The specific program name is in the Pgm field.
To select a program type, use this field to select a drum program (Drum), plugin program (Plugin), MIDI
program (Midi), keygroup program (KGrp), clip program (Clip), or CV program (CV).
The screen may show additional fields, depending on the type of program:
•
Drum Program: (no additional fields)
•
Plugin Program:
Note: You have to specify the disk directory where your plugins are located. This can be done in the
software’s Preferences. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click
the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
Plg is the preset (if any) within the plugin the program is using.
To select a preset, select this field, and then press Window. In the screen that appears, select
the desired preset, and press F5/Select to continue or F4/Close to return to the previous
screen. You can press F2/AutoSel to activate or deactivate automatic selection, which will
automatically load each preset as you move through the list.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
•
MIDI Program:
Port is the port over which the program sends its MIDI data.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the Preferences. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC
User Manual.
To select a port, use this field.
PC is the program change message the program sends out.
To select a program change message, use this field.
To set the MSB and LSB (Most Significant Byte and Least Significant Byte), select this field, and
then press Window. In the screen that appears, set Bank Enable to ON or OFF. When set to
ON, select the Bank MSB or Bank LSB values. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
•
Keygroup Program: (no additional fields)
79
•
Clip Program: (no additional fields)
•
CV Program:
Port is the port over which the program sends its MIDI data.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the Preferences. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC
User Manual.
To select a port, use this field.
PC is the program change message the program sends out.
To select a program change message, use this field.
To set the MSB and LSB (Most Significant Byte and Least Significant Byte), select this field, and
then press Window. In the screen that appears, set Bank Enable to ON or OFF. When set to
ON, select the Bank MSB or Bank LSB values. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
Pgm is the program used by the current track.
To select a program, use this field.
To edit the program, select this field, and then press Window. In the Edit Program screen that appears:
•
F2/Delete erases all events from the track and resets all of its settings. Press F4/Delete to continue or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/New creates a new program. New Name is the name that the new program will use. Use the Type
field to determine the type of program.
•
F4/Copy immediately creates an identical program. The duplicate program will use the same name but
appended with a number (e.g., Drums-1).
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
The parameter in the lower-right corner varies depending on the last parameter you adjusted in its sub-window.
To adjust the parameter, use this field.
To edit the parameters in its sub-window, select this field, and then press Window. Use the fields and buttons
in the screen that appears (MIDI programs or CV programs will show only the fields under the Track column):
80
Level is the volume level of the program (if it is under Program) or track (if it is under Track). (You can also
use the numeric keypad to change this number.)
Pan is the panning position of the program (if it is under Program) or track (if it is under Track) in the stereo
field: 50 L (left) to 50 R (right). C indicates the center position. (If you use the numeric keypad to change this
number, use values from 0 to 100: 0 corresponds to 50 L, 50 corresponds to C, and 100 corresponds to 50 R.)
Mute determines whether or not the program is muted (Mute) or not (____).
Automation is the program’s automation status.
When off (x), the program will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off
by pressing and holding Shift while pressing the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not record any additional automation
over it. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while
recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs assigned to
automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
Tip: See General Features > Automation to learn about setting global automation or automation for
individual programs and audio tracks.
Send1–4 show the send levels of the program (0–100).
Inserts 1–4 show the insert effects loaded to the program.
To load an effect, use its Insert field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears. Press
F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears,
press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Tran is the transposition (in semitones) of the track: -24 to +24. Off indicates no transposition (0 semitones).
Vel% determines how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice
as loud. The maximum velocity level is still 127, though.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without confirming your changes.
F5/Set confirms your changes and returns to the previous screen.
Audio Tracks
These are the buttons under the screen for audio tracks:
F1
Midi
Press this button to view your MIDI tracks in Main Mode.
F2
Audio
Press this button to view your audio tracks in Main Mode.
F3
Track–
Press this button to select the previous track.
F4
Track+
Press this button to select the next track.
F5
Mute
Press this button to mute the current track.
F6
Solo
Press this button to solo the current track.
81
Shift+F1
T.C.
Press these buttons to open the Timing Correct/T.C. screen, which contains various
settings to help quantize the note events in your sequence. See General Features >
Timing Correct/T.C. to learn about this.
Shift+F2
Click
Press these buttons to open the Click/Metronome screen, which contains all settings
regarding the metronome (click track). See General Features > Click/Metronome to
learn about this.
Shift+F3
Peak
Press these buttons to reset the peak indicator on the input level meter.
Shift+F4
RecArm
Press these buttons to record-arm or record-disarm the audio track.
Trk is the current track number and its name.
To select a track, use this field. Alternatively, press F3/Track– or F4/Track+.
To edit the track, select this field, and then press Window. Use the buttons in the Edit Current Track screen
that appears:
•
F2/Clear erases all regions from the audio track without erasing the track itself. Press F4/OK to
continue or F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/New creates a new audio track. Use the fields in the New Audio Track window that appears:
Input is the input source of the external audio signal: a stereo pair (Input 1,2–Input 31,32) or a mono
channel (Input 1–32).
Ascending determines if the channel numbers of the input sources will ascend across the new audio
tracks you create. When set to ON, the first new audio track will use the input source you set above
(e.g., Input 1,2), the second new audio track will use the next input source (e.g., Input 3,4), the third
new audio track (if applicable) will use the next one (e.g., Input 5,6), etc. When set to OFF, all of the
new audio tracks you create in this instance will use the same input source. This feature is relevant
only if you are creating more than one new audio track (determined by Number Of Tracks below).
Record Enable determines whether or not the track will be record-enabled (ON) or not (OFF). When
you begin audio recording, the audio signal will be recorded to this track.
Input Monitor determines how the track will be monitored: OFF (you will not hear any incoming
audio), ON (you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled), or AUTO (you
will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only).
Number Of Tracks is the number of tracks you will create. (You can also use the numeric keypad
to change this number.)
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without confirming your changes.
F5/Do It confirms your changes and returns to the previous screen.
•
F4/Delete erases the entire audio track. Press F4/Delete to continue or F3/Cancel to return to the
previous screen.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
Input is the input source of the external audio signal: a stereo pair (Input 1,2–Input 31,32) or a mono channel (Input
1–32).
To select an input, use this field.
Mon determines how the new audio track will be monitored.
To select a monitoring option, use this field to select an option:
•
OFF: You will not hear any incoming audio.
•
ON: You will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
•
AUTO: You will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
82
The input level meter shows the current volume level of the audio track.
The peak indicator turns solid when the input level meter has exceeded the maximum volume level.
To reset the peak indicator, press Shift+F3/Peak.
Rec Arm shows whether or not the track will be record-enabled (ON) or not (OFF). When you begin audio recording,
the audio signal will be recorded to this track.
To record-arm or record-disarm the track, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively). Alternatively, press
Shift+F4/RecArm.
Level is the input gain level of the audio track. This controls the volume level of the audio signal as it records, not as
it plays back.
To set the input gain level, use the integer or decimal field.
To set the input gain level and other track settings, select this field, and then press Window. Use the fields
and buttons in the screen that appears:
Level is the input gain level of the track. This controls the volume level of the audio signal as it records, not
as it plays back. (You can also use the numeric keypad to change this number.)
Pan is the panning position of the track in the stereo field: 50 L (left) to 50 R (right). C indicates the center
position. (If you use the numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 100: 0 corresponds to
50 L, 50 corresponds to C, and 100 corresponds to 50 R.)
Mute determines whether or not the track is muted (Mute) or not (____).
Automation is the track’s automation status.
When off (x), the track will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered automation,
this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off by pressing
and holding Shift while pressing the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the track will read automation data but will not record any additional automation over
it. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the track can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs assigned to
automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
Tip: See General Features > Automation to learn about setting global automation or automation for
individual programs and audio tracks.
Send1–4 show the send levels of the track (0–100).
Inserts 1–4 show the insert effects loaded to the track.
To load an effect, use its Insert field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears. Press
F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears,
press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without confirming your changes.
F5/Set confirms your changes and returns to the previous screen.
83
Step Sequencer
The Step Sequencer lets you create or edit sequences by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the
experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
This is available for MIDI tracks only, not audio tracks.
To enter the Step Sequencer, press Step Seq. (If you cannot enter it because you are viewing audio tracks, press
Main and then press F1/Midi to view MIDI tracks first.)
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
To enter or delete steps in a sequence:
1. Press F4/Pad Sel to select the pad whose steps you want to enter or delete, and then press the pad on your
MPC hardware. The current pad number is in the Pad field in the upper-right corner. Alternatively, use the Pad
field to change the number. (If you use the numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 127,
corresponding to Pad A01 to Pad H16.)
2. Press F2/Bar– or F3/Bar+ to select the bar of the sequence whose steps you want to enter or delete. The current
bar number is in the upper-left corner. Alternatively, use the Bar field to change the number.
3. Press the pads of your MPC hardware to enter or delete steps. Each pad corresponds to a step in the bar and
will light with a color corresponding to its velocity.
Keep in mind that for time divisions larger than 16, the bar’s steps will be represented by multiple pad banks. In
this case, use the Pad Bank buttons to view all the steps within a bar.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
T.C.
Press this button to open the Timing Correct/T.C. screen, which contains various settings to
help quantize the note events in your sequence. See General Features > Timing Correct/T.C.
to learn about this.
F2
Bar–
Press this button to select the previous bar of the sequence to edit. The current bar number
is in the Bar field in the upper-right corner.
F3
Bar+
Press this button to select the next bar of the sequence to edit. The current bar number is in
the Bar field in the upper-right corner.
F4
Pad Sel
Press this button to activate or deactivate Pad Select. When this is activated, use the pads to
select a pad rather than enter or delete a step. When this is deactivated, use the pads to
enter or delete steps for the pad in the Pad field in the upper-right corner.
F5
Pad–
Press this button to select the previous pad whose steps you want to edit. The current pad
number is in the Pad field in the upper-right corner.
F6
Pad+
Press this button to select the next pad whose steps you want to edit. The current pad
number is in the Pad field in the upper-right corner.
84
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. (If the Auto Record
feature is on, Punch In or Seq Start will be shown next to the time.) See General Features > Now & Locators to
learn about this.
Bar is the bar of the sequence whose steps you want to enter or delete.
To select a bar, press F2/Bar– or F3/Bar+. Alternatively, use the Bar field.
Pad is the pad whose steps you want to enter or delete.
To select a pad, press F4/Pad Sel and then press the pad on your MPC hardware. Alternatively, use the Pad
field. If you use the numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 127, corresponding to Pad
A01 to Pad H16.
Seq is the current sequence number and its name.
To select a sequence, use this field.
To edit the sequence, select this field, and then press Window. Use the buttons in the Edit Current Sequence
screen that appears:
•
F2/Clear clears all events from the sequence and resets all of its settings. Press F4/Clear to continue or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/Double immediately doubles the sequence in length and copies all events from the first half to the
second half.
•
F4/Copy copies the contents of one sequence to another. Copy Contents of Sequence is the “source”
whose events you want to copy. Over Contents of Sequence is the “destination” sequence where the
source sequence will be copied. Set each field to the desired sequence. Press F5/Do It to continue or
F4/Back to return to the previous screen.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
BPM is the tempo of the sequence.
To set the tempo, press Tap Tempo in time with the desired tempo. Alternatively, use this integer or decimal
field.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (seq) or a master tempo (mst), press Shift+Tap Tempo.
Alternatively, select seq/mst, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
Bars is the length of the sequence in bars.
To set the number of bars, use this field.
Loop determines whether or not the sequence (or a part of it) will loop.
To enable or disable looping, use this field.
To set the start point and end point of loop, use the cursors to select this field, and then press Window. In
the Loop Measures screen, use the cursors to select each field, and then use the numeric keypad, data dial,
or –/+ buttons to change the number:
First Bar is the first bar of the loop.
Last Bar is the last bar of the loop.
Number of Bars is the total number of bars in the sequence.
The level meter in the upper-right corner shows the current volume level of the master mix.
85
Tran is the transposition (in semitones) of the entire sequence: -24 to +24. Off indicates no transposition (0 semitones).
To set the transposition, use this field.
The In and Out boxes show that your MPC hardware is receiving or sending (respectively) MIDI messages from or to
your computer.
16 track indicators are arranged in a 4x4 grid of dots or squares next to the In and Out boxes. Dots indicate
empty/unused tracks. Solid squares indicate used tracks. The outlined square indicates the currently selected track.
To select a track, use the Trk field.
Trk is the current track number and its name.
To select a track, use this field.
To edit the track, select this field, and then press Window. Use the buttons in the Edit Current Track screen
that appears:
•
F2/Clear clears all events from the track and resets all of its settings. Press F4/OK to continue or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/Explode immediately splits the current track into multiple tracks—one for each distinct pad or note
(pitch, not event). The current track will also remain present and intact, while each track created from it is
labeled with the track name and pad name or number.
•
F4/Copy copies the contents of one track to another. Copy Contents of Track is the “source” track
whose events you want to copy. Over Contents of Track is the “destination” track where the source
track will be copied. Set each field to the desired track. Press F5/Do It to continue or F4/Back to return
to the previous screen.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
Length determines how long the track is in beats. If you select the minimum value, Seq (or 0), the track will be the
exact same length as its sequence.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
To set the track length, use this field.
Type shows the type of program through which the track is being routed. The specific program name is displayed by
the Pgm field.
To select a program type, use this field to select a drum program (Drum), plugin program (Plugin), MIDI
program (Midi), keygroup program (KGrp), clip program (Clip), or CV program (CV).
The screen may show additional fields, depending on the type of program:
•
Drum Program: (no additional fields)
•
Plugin Program:
Note: You have to specify the disk directory where your plugins are located. This can be done in the
software’s Preferences. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click
the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
Plg is the preset (if any) within the plugin the program is using.
To select a preset, select this field, and then press Window. In the screen that appears, select
the desired preset, and press F5/Select to continue or F4/Close to return to the previous
screen. You can press F2/AutoSel to activate or deactivate automatic selection, which will
automatically load each preset as you move through the list.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
86
•
MIDI Program:
Port is the port over which the program sends its MIDI data.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the Preferences. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC
User Manual.
To select a port, use this field.
PC is the program change message the program sends out.
To select a program change message, use this field.
To set the MSB and LSB (Most Significant Byte and Least Significant Byte), select this field, and
then press Window. In the screen that appears, set Bank Enable to ON or OFF. When set to
ON, select the Bank MSB or Bank LSB values. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
•
Keygroup Program: (no additional fields)
•
Clip Program: (no additional fields)
•
CV Program:
Port is the port over which the program sends its MIDI data.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the Preferences. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC
User Manual.
To select a port, use this field.
PC is the program change message the program sends out.
To select a program change message, use this field.
To set the MSB and LSB (Most Significant Byte and Least Significant Byte), select this field, and
then press Window. In the screen that appears, set Bank Enable to ON or OFF. When set to
ON, select the Bank MSB or Bank LSB values. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Ch is the MIDI channel the program uses. Use this setting when you are working with a virtual
instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a MIDI channel, use this field.
Pgm is the program used by the current track.
To select a program, use this field.
To edit the program, select this field, and then press Window. In the Edit Program screen that appears:
•
F2/Delete erases all events from the track and resets all of its settings. Press F4/Delete to continue or
F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
F3/New creates a new program. New Name is the name that the new program will use. Type is the type
of program.
•
F4/Copy immediately creates an identical program. The duplicate program will use the same name but
appended with a number (e.g., Drums-1).
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
87
The parameter in the lower-right corner varies depending on the last parameter you adjusted in its sub-window.
To adjust the parameter, use this field.
To edit the parameters in its sub-window, select this field, and then press Window. Use the fields and buttons
in the screen that appears (MIDI programs or CV programs will show only the fields under the Track column):
Level is the volume level of the program (if it is under Program) or track (if it is under Track). (You can also
use the numeric keypad to change this number.)
Pan is the panning position of the program (if it is under Program) or track (if it is under Track) in the stereo
field: 50 L (left) to 50 R (right). C indicates the center position. (If you use the numeric keypad to change this
number, use values from 0 to 100: 0 corresponds to 50 L, 50 corresponds to C, and 100 corresponds to 50 R.)
Mute determines whether or not the program is muted (Mute) or not (____).
Automation is the program’s automation status.
When off (x), the program will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off
by pressing and holding Shift while pressing the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not record any additional automation
over it. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while
recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs assigned to
automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
Tip: See General Features > Automation to learn about setting global automation or automation for
individual programs and audio tracks.
Send1–4 show the send levels of the program (0–100).
88
Inserts 1–4 show the insert effects loaded to the program.
To load an effect, use its Insert field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears. Press
F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears,
press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Tran is the transposition (in semitones) of the track: -24 to +24. Off indicates no transposition (0 semitones).
Vel% determines how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice
as loud. The maximum velocity level is still 127, though.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without confirming your changes.
F5/Set confirms your changes and returns to the previous screen.
You can also use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the velocity of the note event at each step. The numbers of the steps
that correspond to the Q-Link knobs will be shown in the screen.
To show the step numbers in the screen, press Shift+Prog Edit/Q-Links, and then press F5/Screen. Press
F6/Parameter/Value to switch between viewing the parameter names (Parameter) and values (Value) in the
screen.
To adjust the velocity of each note event, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to select a value (1–127).
To enter a note event at a step, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to change its velocity from 0 (Off) to a
value of 1 or greater.
To delete a note event from a step, set the corresponding Q-Link knob to its minimum position, 0 (Off).
89
Sample Edit Mode
Sample Edit Mode lets you edit samples in three different sub-modes: Trim Mode, Chop Mode, or Program Mode.
Each mode has slightly different functions and methods of operation. Please refer to the Trim Mode, Chop Mode,
and Program Mode parts of this chapter to learn how each works.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, press Sample Edit.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Some information shown on this screen is common to all Sample Edit Modes, while other information is used for
Trim Mode only, Chop Mode only, or Program Mode only.
Tip: You can use Trim Mode for a specific slice of the sample, previously created and selected in Chop Mode. This
allows for a more detailed view of a single slice than in Chop Mode and gives you more options for auditioning the
slice. You can easily switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode while doing this.
To use both Trim Mode and Chop Mode to edit a sample slice:
1. Press F1/Trim/Chop so it shows the Chop tab (Chop Mode).
2. Set all fields as desired to create your sample slices.
3. Set Slice to the desired slice.
4. Press F1/Trim/Chop so it shows the Trim tab (Trim Mode). The region you are now editing is indicated by the
normal start point and end point markers rather than slice markers.
5. Press F1/Trim/Chop so at any time to return to the Chop tab (Chop Mode).
90
Trim Mode
We recommend using Trim Mode to simply crop the start and/or end from a sample.
To enter Trim Mode, press F1/Trim/Chop.
These are the buttons under the screen in Trim Mode:
F1
Trim
Press this button to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. See Chop Mode to
learn about it.
F2
Program
Press this button to enter Program Mode. See Program Mode to learn more.
F3
Zoom Out
Press this button to zoom out of the waveform.
F4
Zoom In
Press this button to zoom in on the waveform.
F5
Assign
Press this button to show the Assign Sample screen, where you can assign the sample
to a program or pad. See Trim Mode > Assigning Samples to learn more.
F6
Process
Press this button to show the Process Slice screen, where you can select different ways in
which to process the slice. See Trim Mode > Processing Slices & Samples to learn more.
Shift+F3
0 Snap
Press these buttons to activate or deactivate 0 Snap, which forces start points, end
points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help
prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
Shift+F4
Loop
Press these buttons to switch the loop function between Fwd and Off. See the loop
function described here.
Sample is the sample you are currently editing.
To select a sample, use this field.
Loop Lock determines whether or not the Loop Lock feature is on. When set to ON, the sample’s loop point is the
same as the start point. When set to OFF, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a
separate marker.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Link determines whether or not the Link feature is activated. When activated (ON), changing the start point of a slice
will also change the end point of the previous slice—and similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change
the start point of the next slice. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode to use this. Set Link to OFF if
you are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample.
To enable or disable Link, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Important: Link must be disabled (OFF) to make slices non-sequential, non-contiguous, or overlapping.
91
The waveform shows the “active” section of the sample’s waveform. The highlighted section of the waveform is the
currently selected part.
To zoom in on or zoom out of the waveform, press F4/Zoom In or F3/Zoom Out (respectively). Alternatively,
turn Q-Link Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To scroll through the waveform, turn Q-Link Knob 8 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the
fourth column (MPC Studio).
Start is the start point of the sample or currently selected slice.
End is the end point of the sample or currently selected slice.
To change the start point or end point, do either of the following:
•
Use the Start or End field (respectively).
•
Use the first or second column of Q-Link knobs (respectively). The top-most Q-Link knob (13 and 14) in
each column provides coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly
in a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence
or unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
Loop is the loop point of the sample or currently selected slice, which appears as a solid vertical line in the waveform.
When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful
when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To change the loop point, do either of the following:
•
Use this field.
•
Use the third column of Q-Link knobs. The top-most Q-Link knob (15) provides coarse adjustment. The
bottom-most Q-Link knobs (3) provides fine adjustment.
Slice is which slice of the sample you are editing. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode to use this. 0
corresponds to All.
To select a slice to edit (after you have created slices in Chop Mode), use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 16.
BPM is the tempo of the sample.
To enter a tempo manually, use the integer or decimal field.
To detect the tempo automatically, select the integer or decimal field, and then press Window. Use the fields
and buttons in the Edit BPM window that appears:
•
Use the integer or decimal BPM field to enter a tempo manually.
•
F2/Detect detects the tempo of the sample automatically.
•
Press F3/Tap Tempo at the desired rate to use it as the tempo. You can play a sequence in the
background to help with your timing.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
Note: Before detecting tempo, it is recommended that you Normalize samples for best results.
Note is the root note of the sample. This determines which note will play the sample at its original pitch when in a
keygroup program.
To set the root note, use this field.
92
Loop determines how the sample is currently being looped. When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample
between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample.
The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To set how the sample loops, use this field to select an option:
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward (Fwd): When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing again from the loop point.
•
Alternating (Alt): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop
point again, it will start playing forward again from the loop point.
•
Reverse (Rev): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop
point again, it will return to the end point and continue playing in reverse.
To switch between Fwd and Off, press Shift+F4/Loop.
Tune determines the sample’s tuning relative to its original pitch.
To tune the sample manually, use the integer or decimal field.
To tune the sample automatically, select the integer or decimal field, and then press Window. Use the fields
and buttons in the Edit Tuning window that appears:
•
Number Of Beats defines how many beats are in the sample according to the tempo.
•
F4/Match automatically tunes the sample to the sequence and returns to the previous screen.
•
F2/To Seq automatically tunes the sample to the sequence, returns to the previous screen, and matches
the sequence’s tempo to the Tempo value from this screen.
•
Use the integer or decimal Tune field to tune the sample manually.
•
F5/Close returns to the previous screen.
0 Snap forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can
help prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press Shift+F3/0 Snap.
93
Use your MPC hardware pads to play certain parts of the selected sample:
Play Loop
13
Play to Loop
Start
14
Play from
Loop Start
15
16
Play Sample
Play Sample
(One Shot)
(Note On)
Play All
09
Play Loop
Continuous
No function
10
11
12
Play from
Start
Play to
Start
Play to
End
Play from
End
(Note On)
(Note On)
(Note On)
(Note On)
05
06
07
08
Play from
Start
Play to
Start
Play to
End
Play from
End
(One Shot)
(One Shot)
(One Shot)
(One Shot)
01
02
03
04
Play Sample (One Shot) (Pad 10) plays the sample once from the start point to the end point. Press the pad
once to play it.
Play Sample (Note On) (Pad 11) plays the sample once from the start point to the end point. Press and hold the
pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play Loop Continuous (Pad 16) plays the sample repeatedly using the mode set by the Loop button (Forward,
Reverse, or Alternating; if the Loop button is off, the sample will loop forward repeatedly).
Play Loop (Pad 13) plays the sample repeatedly using the mode set by the Loop button (Forward, Reverse, or
Alternating; if the Loop button is off, the sample will loop forward repeatedly). Press and hold the pad to play it,
and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play to Loop Start (Pad 14) plays the part of the sample just before the loop point. Press and hold the pad to
play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play from Loop Start (Pad 15) plays the sample from the loop point to the end of the sample regardless of the
end point. Press and hold the pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play All (Pad 9) plays the entire sample.
Pads 1–4 have the same respective functions as Pads 5–8, but Pads 1–4 play the sample part as “One Shots”
(pressing the pad once will play the entire part) while Pads 5–8 play the sample part as “Note Ons” (pressing the pad
and holding it will play the part; releasing it will stop playback):
Play from Start (Pad 1, Pad 5) plays the sample from the start point to the end point.
Play to Start (Pad 2, Pad 6) plays the part of the sample just before the start point to the start point.
Play to End (Pad 3, Pad 7) plays the part of the sample just before the end point to the end point.
Play from End (Pad 4, Pad 8) plays the part of the sample from the end point to the end of the sample.
94
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Trim Mode.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
To assign a sample, press F5/Assign, and use the fields and buttons in the Assign Sample window that appears.
Assign To determines how the sample will be assigned.
Assign slice to a pad refers the pad to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample. This is
useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Pad determines the pad to which the slice will be assigned. You can also press a pad to select it.
Slice Type determines how the pad’s layer settings will be set when the slice is assigned to it (see
Program Edit Mode to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
•
Non-Destructive Slice sets each pad’s Slice setting to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters sets each pad’s Slice setting to Pad. The pad Start and End parameters will
be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop position parameter will be set
to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Program determines the program to which the slice will be added.
Make new sample creates a new sample in your project. The original sample will remain as it is.
Pad determines the pad to which the slice will be assigned. You can also press a pad to select it.
Crop Sample determines whether or not the sample will be cropped. When set to ON, the unused parts
of the sample will be deleted when it is created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though the
project will still contain your original sample. When set to OFF, the sample will not be cropped, enabling
you to edit the sample further even if you are using only part of it at the moment.
Program determines the program to which the slice will be added.
F5/Do It assigns the sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without assigning the sample.
95
Processing Slices & Samples
To apply various editing processes to the sample, press F6/Process, and use the fields and buttons in the Process
Slice window that appears.
Function determines how the sample will be processed.
Note: Almost all processes will affect only the part of the sample between the start point and the end point. Only
Bit Reduce and Stereo -> Mono will affect the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
Discard deletes the regions before the start point and after the end point.
Delete deletes the region between the start point and end point and closes the gap between them.
Silence replaces the region between the start point and end point with silence.
Extract deletes the regions before the start point and after the end point and saves it as a new sample in
your current project.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a snare drum hit, a kick drum hit,
etc. to use separately in the project.
Normalize increases a sample’s level to the highest level possible without distortion. This is essentially a
kind of digital gain optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings when working
with samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
Reverse reverses the region between the start point and end point.
Fade In sets a fade-in between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
•
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
•
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
•
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
Fade Out sets a fade-out between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
•
Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
•
Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
•
Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
Pitch Shift changes the pitch of the sample without changing its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch
to your sequence without affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Use the Pitch field to determine the
amount: -12.00 to 12.00 semitones. 0 corresponds to no pitch shift. Keep in mind that the audio quality may
decrease at more extreme settings.
96
Time Stretch lengthens or shortens the sample without changing its pitch. This is useful for matching the
durations of two samples with different pitches.
•
Number Of Beats determines the desired number of beats according to the new tempo.
•
New determines the new tempo (Ratio will then automatically show the time stretch factor).
•
Ratio is the time-stretch factor of the process (New will then automatically change based on this
time stretch factor).
Gain Change raises or lowers the volume of the sample. Use the Gain Amount field to determine the amount:
-18 to 18 dB. 0 corresponds to no gain change. This function is different than Normalize because it will allow
volumes beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to watch your output level!
Copy saves a copy of the sample.
Bit Reduce lowers the bit resolution of a sample, effectively reducing its degree of faithful reproduction. Use
the Bit Depth field to determine the bit depth of the resulting sample: 1–16 bits. The sound is similar to the
Resampler effect, but Bit Reduce will permanently alter the sample.
Tip: Use this on drum loops to get a dirty, “old-school” sizzle but with a digital “edge.”
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
Stereo -> Mono converts a stereo sample to a new mono sample and saves it as a new sample. Use the
Source field to determine which channels are converted:
•
Left converts the left channel only.
•
Right converts the right channel only.
•
Sum combines the left and right audio channels to a single mono channel.
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
F5/Do It applies the process to sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without applying any process.
97
Chop Mode
Whereas Trim Mode crops only the start and/or end off of a sample, Chop Mode divides the sample into multiple
regions called slices. We recommend using Chop Mode when working with a long sample with different sounds
throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To enter Chop Mode, press F1/Trim/Chop.
These are the buttons under the screen in Chop Mode:
F1
Chop
Press this button to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. See Trim Mode to
learn about it.
F2
Program
Press this button to enter Program Mode. See Program Mode to learn more.
F3
Zoom Out
Press this button to zoom out of the waveform.
F4
Zoom In
Press this button to zoom in on the waveform.
F5
Play Cue
Press this button to play the sample from the cue playhead.
F6
Slice +
Press this button to create a slice marker at the cue playhead position. You can do this
at any point during sample playback.
Shift+F1
One Shot
Press these buttons to enable or disable the One Shot feature. When enabled, pressing a
pad once plays the entire slice. When disabled, pressing the pad and holding it plays the
slice and releasing it stops playback.
Shift+F2
0 Snap
Press these buttons to activate or deactivate 0 Snap, which forces start points, end
points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help
prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
Shift+F3
Process
Press these buttons to show the Process Slice screen, where you can select different
ways in which to process the slice. See Chop Mode > Processing Slices to learn more.
Shift+F4
Convert
Press these buttons to show the Convert or Assign Slices screen, where you can
convert and assign the sample to a program or pad. See Chop Mode > Converting or
Assigning Slices to learn more.
Shift+F5
Clear All
Press these buttons to remove all slice markers from the sample.
Shift+F6
Slice –
Press these buttons to remove the slice marker before the current playhead position
from the sample.
Sample is the sample you are currently editing.
To select a sample, use this field.
98
Link determines whether or not the Link feature is activated. When activated (ON), changing the start point of a slice
will also change the end point of the previous slice—and similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change
the start point of the next slice. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode to use this. Set Link to OFF if
you are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample.
To enable or disable Link, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Important: Link must be disabled (OFF) to make slices non-sequential, non-contiguous, or overlapping.
The waveform shows the “active” section of the sample’s waveform. The highlighted section of the waveform is the
currently selected part.
To zoom in on or zoom out of the waveform, press F4/Zoom In or F3/Zoom Out (respectively), or turn Q-Link
Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To scroll through the waveform, turn Q-Link Knob 8 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the
fourth column (MPC Studio).
Start is where the currently selected slice starts in the sample.
End is where the currently selected slice ends in the sample.
To change the start point or end point, do either of the following:
•
Use the Start or End fields (respectively).
•
Use the first or second column of Q-Link knobs (respectively). The top-most Q-Link knob (13 and 14) in
each column provides coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly
in a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence
or unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
Cue is the position of the cue playhead, which appears as a dotted vertical line in the waveform. This is useful when
manually inserting slice markers. You can set its position and behavior to suit your workflow.
To set the position of cue playhead, use this field.
To play the sample from the cue playhead, press F5/Play Cue.
To create a slice marker at the cue playhead position, press F6/Slice +.
To set how the cue playhead behaves, select Start, End, or Cue, and then press Window. Use the fields and
button in the Cue Play Mode screen that appears:
Cue Play Mode determines how the cue playhead will play audio. When set to One Shot, pressing Play Cue
will play the entire sample from the cue playhead. When set to Toggle, pressing Play Cue will start or stop
playback from cue playhead.
Cue Preview determines if/how audio plays as you move the cue playhead. As you move the cue playhead
through the sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the cue playhead
(Before), play the small part of the sample after the cue playhead (After), or not play at all (Off).
Slice Preview determines if/how audio plays as you move a slice marker. As you move a slice marker
through the sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the slice marker
(Before), play the small part of the sample after the slice marker (After), or not play at all (Off).
F4/Close returns to the previous screen.
99
Slice determines which slice of the sample you are editing. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode to
use this. 0 corresponds to All.
To select a slice to edit (after you have created slices in Chop Mode), use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 16
(MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To split or combine slices, select this field, and then press Window. Use the buttons in the Split/Combine
Slice screen that appears:
•
Split places a slice marker halfway through the current slice, dividing it into two equal slices.
•
Combine removes the start point of the current slice, consolidating it with the slice before it.
•
Back returns to the previous screen without splitting or combining any slices.
Chop To determines how you want to use Chop Mode:
To select a method, select this field, and then press Window. Use the field in the Chop Mode screen that
appears, and then press F5/Do It to continue or F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
•
Manual lets you insert slices at locations you select.
•
Threshold uses an adjustable detection algorithm that derives the number of slices created from the
volume levels present in the sample.
•
Regions divides a sample into several slices of equal length.
•
BPM divides a sample into several slices based on the tempo (beats per minute).
The screen may show additional fields, depending on the type of program:
Manual: (no additional fields)
Threshold:
Threshold determines the threshold level. The higher the selected value, the more slices will be created.
To set the threshold, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the second QLink knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
Min Time determines the minimum length of a slice in milliseconds.
To set the minimum time, use this field.
Regions:
Regions determines how many slices into which the sample will be divided. The higher the selected
value, the more slices will be created.
To set the number of regions, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the
second Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
BPM:
Bars determines how many bars are in the sample.
To set the number of bars, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the second
Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
Beats determines how many beats are in each bar.
To set the number of beats, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 7 (MPC Renaissance) or the third
Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
Time Div shows the note division. The slice markers will be placed according to this setting. You can
select 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32. (In most cases, you should set this parameter to 1/16.)
To set the time division, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 3 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth QLink knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
One Shot determines how a slice is played when you press its corresponding pad. When enabled, pressing a pad once
plays the entire slice. When disabled, pressing the pad and holding it plays the slice and releasing it stops playback.
To enable or disable One Shot, press Shift+F4/One Shot.
0 Snap forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can
help prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press Shift+F3/0 Snap.
100
You can create or remove slice markers at the current cue playhead position while your sample is playing or stopped.
To create a slice marker at the cue playhead position, press F6/Slice +.
To remove the slice marker before the current playhead position from the sample, press Shift+F6/Slice –.
To remove all slice markers from a sample, press Shift+F5/Clear All.
To insert a slice marker during sample playback, press an unlit pad (usually Pad 1) to start playback of the
sample, and then press an unlit pad during playback to place a slice marker at each location of the playhead. (If
you press a lit pad, playback will restart from that pad’s corresponding slice marker.) The number of the pad that
is lit green is the number of the most-recently inserted slice marker. The numbers of the pads that are lit yellow
are the numbers of the slice markers that are already inserted.
101
Converting or Assigning Slices
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Chop Mode. You can also convert it into a new program or
patched phrase.
To convert or assign a sample, press Shift+F4/Convert, and use the fields and buttons in the Convert or Assign
Slices window that appears.
Convert To determines how the sample will be assigned.
New drum program using slices creates a new drum program and assign the sample’s slices to its pads.
The pads will simply refer to the slices in this sample instead of creating new samples. This is useful for
reducing clutter in your project. The new program will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
Slice Type determines how each pad’s layer settings will be set when the slices are assigned to them
(see Program Edit Mode to learn more):
•
Non-Destructive Slice sets each pad’s Slice setting to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters sets each pad’s Slice setting to Pad. The pad Start and End parameters will
be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop position parameter will be set
to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Create Events, when set to ON, automatically creates a new track for the new program in which each
pad plays its corresponding slice in ascending sequence by pad number. When set to OFF, the program
will be added to the project without a track.
Number Of Bars determines how many bars the slices’ events will occupy. This is available only if Create
Events is set to ON.
New clip program creates a new clip program and assigns the sample’s slices to its pads as clips. The pads
will simply refer to the slices in this sample instead of creating new samples. This is useful for reducing
clutter in your project. The new program will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
Tempo is the tempo of the clips in the new program.
Create Events, when set to ON, automatically creates a new track for the new program in which each
pad plays its corresponding slice in ascending sequence by pad number. When set to OFF, the program
will be added to the project without a track.
Number Of Bars determines how many bars the slices’ events will occupy. This is available only if Create
Events is set to ON.
102
New program with new samples creates a new sample from each slice and assign them to pads in a new
program. The new program (if Create New Program is set to ON) will be named after the sample and
appended with ch. The new samples will be appended with SI-# (where # is a consecutive number).
Crop Samples determines whether or not the sample will be cropped. When set to ON, the unused
parts of the sample will be deleted when it is created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though
the project will still contain your original sample. When set to OFF, the sample will not be cropped,
enabling you to edit the sample further even if you are using only part of it at the moment.
Create New Program, when set to ON, creates a new drum program and assigns the sample’s slices to
its pads. When set to OFF, each slice will be converted into a sample that is placed in the project’s
sample pool but not assigned to a program or pad.
Create Events, when set to ON, automatically creates a new track for the new program in which each
pad plays its corresponding slice in ascending sequence by pad number. When set to OFF, the program
will be added to the project without a track. This is available only if Create New Program is set to ON.
Number Of Bars determines how many bars the slices’ events will occupy. This is available only if Create
Events is set to ON.
Assign Slice to Pad sets a pad to simply refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample.
This is useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
Pad is the desired pad. (You can also press the desired pad to select it.)
Slice Type determines how each pad’s layer settings will be set when the slices are assigned to them
(see Program Edit Mode to learn more):
•
Non-Destructive Slice sets each pad’s Slice setting to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters sets each pad’s Slice setting to Pad. The pad Start and End parameters will
be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop position parameter will be set
to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Program is the program to which you want to add the slice.
103
New Sample to Pad creates a new sample in your project. The original sample will remain as it is.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
Pad is the desired pad. (You can also press the desired pad to select it.)
Crop Sample determines whether or not the sample will be cropped. When set to ON, the unused parts
of the sample will be deleted when it is created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though the
project will still contain your original sample. When set to OFF, the sample will not be cropped, enabling
you to edit the sample further even if you are using only part of it at the moment.
Program is the program to which you want to add the sample.
Patched Phrase creates a new sample that will play based on the tempo of your sequence and places it in
the current project. The patched phrase will have the same name as the original sample but appended with
pp and will use a different icon when viewing your project information.
Bars determines how many bars long the patched phrase is meant to be.
F5/Do It converts the sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without converting the sample.
104
Processing Slices
To apply various editing processes to the slice, press Shift+F3/Process, and use the fields and buttons in the
Process Slice window that appears.
Note: All processes here will affect the currently selected slice only.
Function determines how the slice will be processed (This has fewer options than Trim Mode.).
Important: Chop Mode is non-destructive: You can choose the slice/edit behavior without destroying your original
sample, giving you more control over sample playback; you can save your sliced sample and but also reuse all of
the slice data in another project. See the Program Edit Mode chapter to learn more about setting a pad to play
the entire sample, a specific slice of a sample, or a specific region of the sample (independent of its slice markers).
Silence replaces the region between the start point and end point with silence.
Extract deletes the regions before the start point and after the end point and saves it as a new sample in
your current project.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a snare drum hit, a kick drum hit,
etc. to use separately in the project.
Normalize increases a slice’s level to the highest level possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind
of digital gain optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings when working with
samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
Reverse reverses the region between the start point and end point.
Fade In sets a fade-in between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
• Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
• Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
• Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
Fade Out sets a fade-out between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
• Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
• Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
• Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
Pitch Shift changes the pitch of the slice without changing its length. This lets you set the slice’s pitch to
your sequence without affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Use the Pitch field to determine the
amount: -12.00 to 12.00 semitones. 0 corresponds to no pitch shift. Keep in mind that the audio quality may
decrease at more extreme settings.
Gain Change raises or lowers the volume of the slice. Use the Gain Amount field to determine the amount: -18
to 18 dB. 0 corresponds to no gain change. This function is different than Normalize because it will allow
volumes beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to watch your output level!
F5/Do It applies the process to sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without applying any process.
105
Program Mode
Program Mode lets you edit a sample in the context of the program in which you’ll use it. You can adjust the pad
parameters as though you were in Program Edit Mode, auditioning and hearing how it will sound in the program’s
audio path.
To enter Program Mode, press F2/Program.
These are the buttons under the screen in Program Mode:
F1
Trim
Press this button to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. See Trim Mode and
Chop Mode to learn about each one.
F2
Program
Press this button to enter Program Mode.
F3
Zoom Out
Press this button to zoom out of the waveform.
F4
Zoom In
Press this button to zoom in on the waveform.
F5
Assign
Press this button to show the Assign Sample screen, where you can assign the
sample to a program or pad. See Trim Mode > Assigning Samples to learn more.
F6
Process
Press this button to show the Process Slice screen, where you can select different
ways in which to process the slice. See Trim Mode > Processing Slices & Samples
to learn more.
Shift+F3
0 Snap
Press these buttons to activate or deactivate 0 Snap, which forces start points, end
points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can
help prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
Shift+F4
Loop
Press these buttons to switch the loop function between Fwd and Off. See the loop
function described here.
Shift+F6
To Pad/To All
Press these buttons to switch the Slice setting between Pad and All.
Press each pad to hear its sample/samples. The sample on its first layer will automatically appear in the waveform
display for editing.
Sample is the sample you are currently editing.
To select a sample, use this field.
Loop Lock determines whether or not the Loop Lock feature is on. When set to ON, the sample’s loop point is the
same as the start point. When set to OFF, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a
separate marker.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
The waveform shows the “active” section of the sample’s waveform. The highlighted section of the waveform is the
currently selected part.
To zoom in on or zoom out of the waveform, press F4/Zoom In or F3/Zoom Out (respectively). Alternatively,
turn Q-Link Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To scroll through the waveform, turn Q-Link Knob 8 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the
fourth column (MPC Studio).
106
Start is the start point of the sample or currently selected slice. This is shown if Slice is set to All.
PStart is the start point of the sample or currently selected slice. This is shown if Slice is set to Pad.
End is the end point of the sample or currently selected slice. This is shown if Slice is set to All.
PEnd is the end point of the sample or currently selected slice. This is shown if Slice is set to Pad.
To change the start point or end point (when Slice it set to All), do either of the following:
•
Use the Start or End field.
•
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs. The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 14) provide coarse adjustment.
The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly
in a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence
or unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
Loop is the loop point of the sample or currently selected slice, which appears as a solid vertical line in the waveform.
When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful
when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To change the loop point, do either of the following:
•
Use this field.
•
Use the third column of Q-Link knobs. The top-most Q-Link knob (15) provides coarse adjustment. The
bottom-most Q-Link knobs (3) provides fine adjustment.
Slice determines whether the waveform shows the sample as it has been edited (Pad) or the entire sample (All).
When set to All, you can display the sample as it has been edited but keep the start point and end point.
To show the edited sample, set this field to Pad, or press Shift+F6/To Pad. PStart, PEnd, and PLoop will show
the start, end, and loop points (respectively) of the edited sample, which will remain in their current positions.
To show the entire sample, set this field to All, or press Shift+F6/To All. Start, End, and Loop will show the
start, end, and loop points (respectively) of the edited sample.
Loop determines how the sample is currently being looped. When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample
between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample.
The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To set how the sample loops, use this field to select an option:
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward (Fwd): When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing again from the loop point.
•
Alternating (Alt): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop
point again, it will start playing forward again from the loop point.
•
Reverse (Rev): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop
point again, it will return to the end point and continue playing in reverse.
To switch between Fwd and Off, press Shift+F4/Loop.
0 Snap forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can
help prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press Shift+F3/0 Snap.
107
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Program Mode.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
To assign a sample, press F5/Assign, and use the fields and buttons in the Assign Sample window that appears.
Assign To determines how the sample will be assigned.
Assign slice to a pad refers the pad to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample. This is
useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Pad determines the pad to which the slice will be assigned. You can also press a pad to select it.
Slice Type determines how the pad’s layer settings will be set when the slice is assigned to it (see
Program Edit Mode to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
•
Non-Destructive Slice sets each pad’s Slice setting to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters sets each pad’s Slice setting to Pad. The pad Start and End parameters will
be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop position parameter will be set
to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Program determines the program to which the slice will be added.
Make new sample creates a new sample in your project. The original sample will remain as it is.
Pad determines the pad to which the slice will be assigned. You can also press a pad to select it.
Crop Sample determines whether or not the sample will be cropped. When set to ON, the unused parts
of the sample will be deleted when it is created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though the
project will still contain your original sample. When set to OFF, the sample will not be cropped, enabling
you to edit the sample further even if you are using only part of it at the moment.
Program determines the program to which the slice will be added.
F5/Do It assigns the sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without assigning the sample.
108
Processing Slices
To apply various editing processes to the sample, press F6/Process, and use the fields and buttons in the Process
Slice window that appears. You can process the sample only if Slice is set to All.
Important: Program Mode is non-destructive: You can choose the slice/edit behavior without destroying your original
sample, giving you more control over sample playback; you can save your sliced sample and but also reuse all of the
slice data in another project. See the Program Edit Mode chapter to learn more about setting a pad to play the entire
sample, a specific slice of a sample, or a specific region of the sample (independent of its slice markers).
Function determines how the sample will be processed.
Note: Almost all processes will affect only the part of the sample between the start point and the end point. Only
Bit Reduce and Stereo -> Mono will affect the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
Discard deletes the regions before the start point and after the end point.
Delete deletes the region between the start point and end point and closes the gap between them.
Silence replaces the region between the start point and end point with silence.
Extract deletes the regions before the start point and after the end point and saves it as a new sample in
your current project.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a snare drum hit, a kick drum hit,
etc. to use separately in the project.
Normalize increases a sample’s level to the highest level possible without distortion. This is essentially a
kind of digital gain optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings when working
with samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
Reverse reverses the region between the start point and end point.
Fade In sets a fade-in between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
•
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
•
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
•
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
Fade Out sets a fade-out between the start point and end point. Use the Type field to set the curve of the fade:
•
Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between the start and end.
•
Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the start and flattening out towards
the end.
•
Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the beginning and growing steeper
towards the end.
109
Pitch Shift changes the pitch of the sample without changing its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch
to your sequence without affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Use the Pitch field to determine the
amount: -12.00 to 12.00 semitones. 0 corresponds to no pitch shift. Keep in mind that the audio quality may
decrease at more extreme settings.
Time Stretch lengthens or shortens the sample without changing its pitch. This is useful for matching the
durations of two samples with different pitches.
•
Number Of Beats determines the desired number of beats according to the new tempo.
•
New determines the new tempo (Ratio will then automatically show the time stretch factor).
•
Ratio is the time-stretch factor of the process (New will then automatically change based on this
time stretch factor).
Gain Change raises or lowers the volume of the sample. Use the Gain Amount field to determine the amount:
-18 to 18 dB. 0 corresponds to no gain change. This function is different than Normalize because it will allow
volumes beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to watch your output level!
Copy saves a copy of the sample.
Bit Reduce lowers the bit resolution of a sample, effectively reducing its degree of faithful reproduction. Use
the Bit Depth field to determine the bit depth of the resulting sample: 1–16 bits. The sound is similar to the
Resampler effect, but Bit Reduce will permanently alter the sample.
Tip: Use this on drum loops to get a dirty, “old-school” sizzle but with a digital “edge.”
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
Stereo -> Mono converts a stereo sample to a new mono sample and saves it as a new sample. Use the
Source field to determine which channels are converted:
•
Left converts the left channel only.
•
Right converts the right channel only.
•
Sum combines the left and right audio channels to a single mono channel.
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
F5/Do It applies the process to sample and returns to the previous screen.
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without applying any process.
110
Program Edit Mode
Program Edit Mode contains all parameters for editing your programs.
To enter Program Edit Mode, press Prog Edit.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
The available parameters in this mode depend on the type of program you are editing.
For drum programs, this mode includes the parameters of four layers as well as all synthesis parameters and
insert effect settings. See the Drum Programs section to learn more.
For keygroup programs, this mode contains slightly more parameters than drum programs. See the Keygroup
Programs section to learn more.
For clip programs, this mode looks very different from that of other programs due to how clip launching works.
See the Clip Programs section to learn more.
For plugin programs, skip to Plugin Programs to learn more.
For MIDI programs and CV programs, skip to MIDI Programs and CV Programs to learn more.
For more general information on the differences between the types of programs, please see General Features >
Programs.
To select a program to edit, use the Program field at the top of the screen.
111
Drum Programs
When using drum programs, Program Edit Mode lets you edit the parameters for each pad.
To select a pad, press it. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately.
These are the buttons under the screen for drum programs:
F1
Master
Press this button to view the Master tab, described here.
F2
Samples
Press this button to cycle the three Samples tabs, described here.
F3
Pan Vel
Press this button to view the Pan Vel (panning and velocity) tab, described here.
F4
Flt Env
Press this button to view the Flt Env (filter envelope) tab, described here.
F5
Lfo Mod
Press this button to view the Lfo Mod (LFO modulation) tab, described here.
F6
Effects
Press this button to view the Effects tab, described here.
You can edit one pad, multiple pads, or all pads of a drum program simultaneously while in Program Edit Mode.
To select how many pads and which pad/pads you are editing, select any parameter in Program Edit Mode
except for the bottom-most eight parameters on the Flt Env tab, and then press Window. In the Edit Zones
screen that appears, set the Edit Mode field:
•
Current: Only the currently selected pad can be edited.
•
Multiple: All selected pads can be edited simultaneously.
•
All: All pads can be edited simultaneously.
Tip: You can immediately select or deselect multiple pads while on any tab in Program Edit Mode (regardless of
the current Edit Mode setting). To do this, press Shift and each desired pad. Edit Mode will automatically
change to the corresponding setting.
112
Master
In the Master tab, you can configure playback settings and tuning for the program and pads.
Poly (Polyphony) is the playback mode of the pads in the program.
To set the playback mode of all pads in the program, use this field to select an option:
•
Mono: Only one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing
its sample/samples, the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that program.
•
Poly: Several pads can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices available).
Semi is the coarse tuning of the program: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning adjustment.
To set the coarse tuning of the program, use this field.
Fine is the fine tuning of the program: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
To set the fine tuning of the program, use this field.
Level is the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples of the current pad.
To set the volume level of the pad, use this field.
Pan is the overall panning position of the loaded sample/samples of the current pad in the stereo field: 50L (left) to
50R (right). C indicates the center position.
To set the panning position of the pad, use this field. If you use the numeric keypad to change this number,
use values from -50 to +50: -50 corresponds to 50L, 0 corresponds to C, and +50 corresponds to 50R.
Sim Play 1–4 (Simultaneous Play) can be set to one to four pads (in the same program) that will be triggered by
pressing the current pad—the pads will play simultaneously.
Tips: This feature is useful for triggering a stack of sounds such as layered kick drums.
To assign pads to play simultaneously with the current pad, use these fields.
Mute Tgt 1–4 (Mute Target) can be set to one to four pads (in the same program) for the currently selected pad.
When the currently selected pad is played, it will immediately silence its mute targets.
To assign pads to the mute target of the current pad, use these fields.
Tips:
This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, especially if only the open or closed hat should be heard.
This feature is similar to the mute group feature, available for both drum programs and keygroup programs.
113
Samples
Each pad can trigger up to four samples, which are assigned in four individual layers. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Press F2/Samples to cycle through its three available tabs.
Important: The parameters in the Samples tabs work in conjunction with Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode). Here’s
how it works:
When working in Sample Edit Mode and using Chop Mode to divide a sample into slices for your pads, you can
convert a slice using Non-Destructive Slice or Pad Parameters.
A Non-Destructive Slice will let its pad to refer to that slice when you press it; the original sample remains intact and
each slice marker is like a “bookmark” for a pad. In Program Edit Mode, you’ll see that the layer to which it’s
assigned has its Slice setting set to the corresponding slice number in the original sample. Playing that pad will
cause it to refer to that slice marker like a “bookmark” instead of creating an entirely new sample of that slice. This
means that you no longer have to clutter your project with a new sample for every slice (though you can still use this
earlier method, if you prefer).
A slice converted using Pad Parameters is very similar to a non-destructive slice described above. The difference is
that in Program Edit Mode, the layers they’re assigned to have their Slice settings set to Pad (instead of the slice
number), and the start and end points will correspond to the slice markers in the original sample.
The first Samples tab contains controls for the pitch, timing, and playback of the current layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point.
When set to On, the loop point is the same as the start point.
When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is
the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Layer is the layer you are editing within the current pad: 1–4.
To select a layer, use this field.
Smpl (Sample) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer of the pad. Remember that the sample has to be
loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project, please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field.
114
Start and End define where the sample will start and stop playing when the pad is triggered.
To change the start point or end point, do either of the following:
•
Use the Start or End field (respectively).
•
Use the first or second column of Q-Link knobs (respectively). The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 14)
provide coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Note: When Loop Lock is set to ON, the loop position (as determined by the Loop field, if enabled) is the same
as the sample’s start point. When set to OFF, the loop position is independent from the start point.
Note: The 0 Snap feature in Sample Edit Mode is helpful when used in conjunction with these settings. 0 Snap
forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings,” which can help
prevent clicks and glitches when playing a sample. See this description to learn more.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly
in a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence
or unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
Loop is where the sample will loop when the pad is triggered. When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample
between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample.
The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To change the loop point, use this field, or use the third column of Q-Link knobs. The top-most Q-Link knob
(15) provides coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (3) provides fine adjustment.
Slice is which slice of the sample is assigned to the pad. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode (in
Sample Edit Mode) to use this. 0 corresponds to All.
Note: The Link Slices setting in Sample Edit Mode is helpful when used in conjunction with this setting. Link Slices
determines how the start point and end point of a slice in a larger sample is set. See this description to learn more.
To select a slice to edit (after you have created slices in Chop Mode in Sample Edit Mode), use this field or turn QLink Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
All: The entire sample will play.
•
Pad: The sample will play from the Start position to the End position, described earlier. This also lets
you activate Loop (if the Sample field in the Lfo Mod tab is set to NoteOn).
•
Slice 1, 2, 3, etc.: If you have sliced the sample in Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode), you can select
which slice will play when you trigger the pad.
Tune is the coarse and fine tuning of the sample when played by the pad. The first number is coarse tuning (-36 to
+36 semitones) and the second number is fine tuning (-99 to +99 cents). 0 corresponds to no tuning adjustment.
Note: These settings will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off). Also, these are the same as Semi and
Fine on the second Samples tab.
To adjust the tuning, use these fields.
Dir (Direction) determines which direction the sample will play.
To set the playback direction, use this field to select an option:
•
Forward (Fwd): The sample will play in the normal forward direction.
•
Reverse (Rev): The sample will play in reverse.
115
Loop determines how the sample will be looped. When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample between the
loop point (determined by the Loop field in the second row) and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to
find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
Important: For Loop to work, you must (1) set the Sample field (in the Lfo Mod tab) to NoteOn instead of OneSht
and (2) set the Slice field (in the first Samples tab) to Pad instead of All or a slice number.
To set how the sample loops, use this field to select an option:
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward (Fwd): You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to repeat from the loop point to the
end of the sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Alternating (Alt): You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play from the loop point to the end
of the sample and then play in reverse until it reaches the loop point again. This will repeat as long as
you are holding the pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Reverse (Rev): You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play in reverse, repeating from the
end of the sample to the loop point. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
Warp determines whether or not stretching the time of the sample will change its pitch and vice versa.
When set to On, lengthening or shortening the sample (based on the BPM) will not change its pitch.
When set to Off, lengthening or shortening the sample will also change its pitch and vice versa. Use the Stretch,
BPM, and BPM Sync settings (described below) in conjunction with this feature. See the note below to learn how to
minimize CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set whether or not the sample is warped, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Stretch is the “stretch factor,” which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is set to On). See the note below to
learn how to minimize CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set the stretch factor, use this field.
BPM is the tempo used when a sample is warped (if Warp is set to On). See the note below to learn how to minimize
CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set the tempo of the sample, use this field.
BPM Sync determines whether the tempo of the sample is linked to or independent of the tempo of the sequence.
When BPM Sync and Warp are both set to On, the sample’s tempo will be “locked” to the tempo of the sequence.
When BPM Sync is set to Off but Warp is set to On, the sample will be independent of the tempo of your sequence—
use the Stretch field to lengthen or shorten a sample. See the note below to learn how to minimize CPU requirements
while using Warp.
To enable or disable BPM Sync, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
•
Avoid using extreme Stretch values.
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Tune parameter) of warped audio.
•
Avoid warping very small track regions.
•
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
•
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample. After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be
warped. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC
Help, and select MPC User Manual.
116
The second Samples tab contains controls for the pitch and volume level of each layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point.
When set to On, the loop point is the same as the start point.
When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is
the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
S1–4 (Sample 1–4) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer (1–4) of the pad. Remember that the
sample has to be loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project,
please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or
the first column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
Semi is the coarse tuning of the sample on each layer: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning
adjustment. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off).
To set the coarse tuning of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (2, 6,
10, or 14 on MPC Renaissance or the second column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
Fine is the fine tuning of the sample on each layer: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off).
To set the fine tuning of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (3, 7,
11, or 15 on MPC Renaissance or the third column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
Level is the volume of the sample on each layer, enabling you to control the “balance” of the samples assigned to
the pad.
To set the volume level of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (4, 8,
12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the fourth column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
117
The third Samples tab contains a control for the offset of the sample on each layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point.
When set to On, the loop point is the same as the start point.
When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is
the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
S1–4 (Sample 1–4) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer (1–4) of the pad. Remember that the
sample has to be loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project,
please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or
the first column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
Offset is the time offset of the sample’s playback on each layer. When this setting is a positive value, playing the pad
will immediately trigger the sample on that layer but at a later point in the sample (specified by this setting). When this
setting is a negative value, the sample playback on that layer will be delayed by the amount specified by this setting.
To set the offset of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (2, 6, 10, or 14
on MPC Renaissance or the second column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
Panning & Velocity
The Pan Vel tab contains settings that determine the stereo placement and velocity ranges of each layer of the pad.
Pan is the panning position of the sample on each layer in the stereo field: 50L (left) to 50R (right). C indicates the
center position.
To set the panning position of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob
(1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or the first column of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio). If you use the numeric
keypad to change this number, use values from -50 to +50: -50 corresponds to 50L, 0 corresponds to C, and +50
corresponds to 50R.
Low and High determine the lowest and highest velocities (respectively) that will trigger the sample on each layer. A range
from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from the respective pad, while, for example,
a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By assigning several samples of one
instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting the velocity ranges of each layer accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a drum hit with low force, medium force, and high force. You can set
each sample to a layer and set the velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only mid-range
velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
To set the velocity range of the sample on each layer, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob:
for low velocities, turn Q-Link Knob 2, 6, 10, or 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second column of Q-Link knobs
(MPC Studio); for high velocities Q-Link Knob 3, 7, 11, or 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third column of Q-Link
knobs (MPC Studio).
118
Filter Envelope
The Flt Env tab contains settings for the filter and amp envelopes that affect the pad.
Type determines the filter that is applied to the selected pad. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of
the available filter types.
To set the filter type, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 13 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the
first row (MPC Studio).
Cutoff is the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for band-pass and
band-stop filter types. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of the available filter types.
To set the filter cutoff frequency, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second Q-Link
knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
Reso (Resonance) is the emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result in a
strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
To set the filter resonance, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob
in the first row (MPC Studio).
Env (Envelope) determines the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher settings
will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes of the filter
Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Env setting and set low Atk and Dec values as well as
a medium-low Sust value of the filter envelope (Flt). This will start a sound with the filter opened and close it shortly
afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand, can sound much
more “alive” with low Env settings and a high Atk value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the higher frequencies.
To set the filter envelope amount, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link
knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
V>Start (VelocityStart) determines how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the sample start point.
To set the “velocity to start,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob
in the second row (MPC Studio).
V>Attack (VelocityAttack) determines how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack
(Atk) phase for the Amp envelope.
To set the “velocity to filter attack,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 10 (MPC Renaissance) or the second
Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
V>Env (VelocityEnvelope) determines to what degree velocity information affects the amount of the filter envelope’s
effect on the cutoff frequency.
To set the “velocity to envelope amount,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the
third Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
V>Filter (VelocityFilter) determines to what degree the velocity of a pad modulates the cutoff frequency directly.
To set the “velocity to filter cutoff,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 12 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth QLink knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
119
The third row of parameters determine how the filter envelope affects the filter frequency over a period of time. There
are three possible sets of parameters, depending on the type of envelope:
•
AD (attack-decay) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Dec (filter decay), and Dec Type (decay type)
•
AHDS (attack-hold-decay-sustain) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Hold (filter hold), Flt Dec (filter decay),
and Flt Sust (filter sustain)
•
ADSR (attack-decay-sustain-release) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Dec (filter decay), Flt Sust (filter
sustain), and Flt Rel (filter release)
See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about these envelope parameters.
To adjust the filter envelope parameters, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (5–8 on MPC
Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the third row on MPC Studio).
To adjust the overall influence of the envelope on the filter frequency, use the Env field or turn Q-Link Knob 16
(MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To set the envelope type, press F5/Lfo Mod and set Sample to One Shot (OneSht), if you want to select an
AD or AHDS envelope, or Note On (NoteOn), if you want to use ADSR envelopes only. To select an AD or AHDS
envelope, press F4/Flt Env, select one of the eight bottom-most parameters, and then press Window. Use the
Filter Envelope AD Mode field in the screen that appears to select an AD envelope (On) or AHDS (Off), and then
press F4/Close.
The fourth row of parameters determine how the amp envelope affects the volume level over a period of time. There
are three possible sets of parameters, depending on the type of envelope:
•
AD (attack-decay) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Dec (amp decay), and Dec Type (decay type)
•
AHDS (attack-hold-decay-sustain) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Hold (amp hold), Amp Dec (amp
decay), and Amp Sust (amp sustain)
•
ADSR (attack-decay-sustain-release) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Dec (amp decay), Amp Sust
(amp sustain), and Amp Rel (amp release)
See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about these envelope parameters.
To adjust the amp envelope parameters, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1–4 on MPC
Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the fourth row on MPC Studio).
To set the envelope type, press F5/Lfo Mod and set Sample to One Shot (OneSht), if you want to select an
AD or AHDS envelope, or Note On (NoteOn), if you want to use ADSR envelopes only. To select an AD or AHDS
envelope, press F4/Flt Env, select one of the eight bottom-most parameters, and then press Window. Use the
Volume Envelope AD Mode field in the screen that appears to select an AD envelope (On) or AHDS (Off), and
then press F4/Close.
120
LFO Modulation
The Lfo Mod tab contains settings that determine sample playback and low-frequency oscillator of the pad.
Mute Group determines if the pad is assigned to a mute group: 1–32 or Off (no mute group). When pads assigned to
the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A mute
group affects pads within that program only; mute groups do not affect pads in other programs.
Tip: This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, especially if only the open or closed hat should be heard.
To set the mute group, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 13 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in
the first row (MPC Studio).
Layer determines how multiple samples assigned to the pad are played:
To set the layer playback option, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second Q-Link
knob in the first row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
Cycle (Cyc): Each time the pad is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the samples
will cycle through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
•
Velocity (Vel): The pad will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
•
Random (Ran): Each time the pad is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random.
Sample determines how much of the samples assigned to the pad are played.
To set the playback amount of the samples on the pad, set this field to OneSht or NoteOn, or turn Q-Link
Knob 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the first row (MPC Studio), to select an option.
•
One Shot (OneSht): The samples will play from start to end when the pad is pressed. Use this when you
want to play short sounds.
•
Note On (NoteOn): The samples will play only as long as the pad is held down. This is better for longer
samples so you can control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad.
Poly (Polyphony) determines how the pad’s sound behaves when multiple hits are registered.
To set the polyphony of the pad, set this field to Mono or Poly, or turn Q-Link Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or
the fourth Q-Link knob in the first row (MPC Studio), to select an option:
•
Mono: Only one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing
its sample/samples, the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that program.
•
Poly: Several pads can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices
available). You can also select a specific number of pads (2–32) so that you can trigger up to this many
pads at the same time (unless they exceed the total number of voices available).
V>Pitch (VelocityPitch), V>Atk (VelocityAttack), V>Amp (VelocityAmp), and V>Pan (VelocityPanning) determine
how much the velocity affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the attack of the filter envelope (Atk), the volume level of
the filter envelope (Amp) and or the panning of the sound (Pan). When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation
is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount also gets stronger depending on the setting of the
corresponding knob.
To adjust the velocity sensitivity of the pad, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (9–12 on
MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the second row (MPC Studio).
121
A low-frequency oscillator (LFO) generates a periodic waveform with an adjustable frequency and shape which can be
used for modulation purposes. The seven settings in the lower half of the screen affect the LFO applied to the pad.
Wave is the type of waveform the LFO uses.
To select the waveform of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 5 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link
knob in the third row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
Sine (best suited for smooth modulations)
•
Triangle (best suited for smooth modulations)
•
S&H (samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated)
•
Saw (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
•
Saw Down (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
•
Square (interesting results with hard-panning modulations)
•
Noise (generates random values and glides)
Rate is the LFO frequency when Sync is on. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete a
cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
To set the frequency of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 6 (MPC Renaissance) or the second QLink knob in the third row (MPC Studio).
Sync determines if or how the LFO’s rate is synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off.
To set the synchronization of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 7 (MPC Renaissance) or the third QLink knob in the third row (MPC Studio).
L>Pitch (LFOPitch), L>Filter (LFOFilter), L>Amp (LFOAmp), and L>Pan (LFOPanning) determine how much
the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the sound
(Amp), and the panning of the sound (Pan). When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When
you press it harder, the modulation amount also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding knob.
To adjust the LFO destinations of the pad, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1–4 on
MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
122
Effects
Effects shows the insert effects and send effect levels for the pad. You can select up to four insert effects for each
pad. Additionally, each pad can be sent to up to four return channels, each of which can have up to four insert
effects of their own. Their audio will be routed through the insert effects on those returns, and the processed audio
will be sent to a master output.
Please see General Features > Effects to learn more about using insert and send effects.
Inserts determines whether insert effects are activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) for the pad.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Insert 1–4 are the four available slots for insert effects on that pad.
To load an effect, select an Insert field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons. In the Select Effect screen that
appears, select an effect. Press F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select an Insert field with an effect, and press Window. In the screen
that appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears, press
F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set the Inserts field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Send 1–4 are the audio signal levels that the pad sends to the four return channels, each of which can have up to
four insert effects—these are send effects. The send effects will then send the audio to the assigned master output at
the designated return levels.
To adjust the send levels, turn their corresponding Q-Link knobs (4, 8, 12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the
Q-Link knobs in the fourth column on MPC Studio).
Important: To edit the send effects, use the Channel Mixer. See Channel Mixer > Returns to learn more how to
do this.
123
Keygroup Programs
When using keygroup programs, Program Edit Mode lets you edit the parameters for each keygroup.
To select a keygroup to edit, press F1/Master and use the Kg Select field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC
Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio). You can select All to edit all keygroups
simultaneously. The current settings will appear on the screen immediately.
These are the buttons under the screen for keygroup programs:
F1
Master
Press this button to view the Master tab, described here.
F2
Samples
Press this button to cycle the three Samples tabs, described here.
F3
Pan Vel
Press this button to view the Pan Vel (panning and velocity) tab, described here.
F4
Flt Env
Press this button to view the Flt Env (filter envelope) tab, described here.
F5
Lfo Mod
Press this button to view the Lfo Mod (LFO modulation) tab, described here.
F6
Effects
Press this button to view the Effects tab, described here.
You can create up to 128 keygroups within a keygroup program. This is useful when working with multi-samples. For
example, if you want to create a realistic piano, you can use different keygroups (e.g., 88 for a grand piano) with every
keygroup containing its own sampled note (with up to four possible velocity layers).
To set the number of keygroups in the program, select any parameter in Program Edit Mode except for the
bottom-most eight parameters on the Flt Env tab, and then press Window. In the Set Number of Keygroups
screen that appears, set the Num Keygroups field to the desired number of keygroups (1–128).
To select a keygroup to edit, press F1/Master and use the Kg Select field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC
Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio). You can select All to edit all keygroups
simultaneously. The current settings will appear on the screen immediately.
124
Master
In the Master tab, you can set the playback mode and tuning for the overall program.
Tip: The Samples and Pan Vel tabs have some parameters similar to those in this section (Level, Pan, Semi, Fine,
etc.). Remember that there are parameters that control the settings for the entire program, while other parameters
control the settings for the current keygroup, and other parameters control the settings for each sample layer (up to 4).
Poly (Polyphony) is the playback mode of the program’s keygroups.
To set the playback mode of all keygroups in the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 13 (MPC
Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the first row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
Mono: Only one keygroup will sound at a time. If a keygroup is played while another (or the same one) is still
playing its sample/samples, the new keygroup will immediately mute all other currently playing keygroups in
that program.
•
Poly: Several keygroups can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices
available).
Semi is the coarse tuning of the program: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning adjustment.
To set the coarse tuning of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second
Q-Link knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
Fine is the fine tuning of the program: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
To set the fine tuning of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third QLink knob in the third column (MPC Studio).
Trans shifts the pitch of the MIDI notes sent to the program: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no transposition.
To set the transposition of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth
Q-Link knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
Kg Select (Keygroup Select) is the keygroup you are currently editing. This parameter works in conjunction with the
Num Keygroups setting in (the Set Number of Keygroups window), which lets you create up to 128 keygroups
within one keygroup program. A default keygroup program contains only one single keygroup. When set to All, you
are editing all keygroups in the program simultaneously.
To select a keygroup to edit, press F1/Master and use the Kg Select field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC
Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio). You can select All to edit all keygroups
simultaneously. The current settings will appear on the screen immediately.
To set the number of keygroups in the program, select any parameter in Program Edit Mode except for the
bottom-most eight parameters on the Flt Env tab, and then press Window. In the Set Number of Keygroups
screen that appears, set the Num Keygroups field to the desired number of keygroups (1–128).
Key Trk (Key Track) allows you to switch automatic transposition on or off. When set to On, the sample/samples in
the current keygroup will play using their assigned transposition. When set to Off, the sample/samples will always
play at the original pitch, no matter which note is triggered by pads or a connected MIDI keyboard.
To enable or disable Key Track, set this field to On or Off (respectively) or turn Q-Link Knob 10 (MPC
Renaissance) or the second Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
125
Level is the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples of the current keygroup.
To set the volume level of the keygroup, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the third
Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
Pan is the overall panning position of the loaded sample/samples of the current keygroup in the stereo field: 50L (left)
to 50R (right). C indicates the center position.
To set the panning position of the keygroup, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 12 (MPC Renaissance) or the
fourth Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio). If you use the numeric keypad to change this number,
use values from -50 to +50: -50 corresponds to 50L, 0 corresponds to C, and +50 corresponds to 50R.
Low Note and High Note determine the note range of the current keygroup. This lets you restrict the key range used
for a sample’s playback. Only notes with a key number higher or equal (Low Key) or lower and equal (High Key) to
the selected value will trigger a sound.
Tip: Set Low Note to A0 and High Note to C8 to emulate the range of a standard 88-key piano.
To set the note range of the keygroup, use these fields or turn Q-Link Knobs 5 and 6 (MPC Renaissance) or
the first and second Q-Link knobs in the third row (MPC Studio).
Kg Semi is the coarse tuning of the keygroup: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning adjustment.
To set the coarse tuning of the keygroup, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 7 (MPC Renaissance) or the third
Q-Link knob in the third row (MPC Studio)
Kg Fine is the fine tuning of the program: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
To set the fine tuning of the keygroup, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 8 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth
Q-Link knob in the third row (MPC Studio).
Kg Ply (keygroup polyphony) field to determine how the keygroup will play.
To set the playback mode of the keygroup, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 1 (MPC Renaissance) or the
first Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
• Mono: Only one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing
its sample/samples, the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that program.
• Poly: Several pads can be triggered at the same time, limited only by the total number of voices
available. You can also select a specific number of pads (2–32) so that you can play up to this many
pads at the same time (unless they exceed the total number of voices available).
Mute Group determines if the keygroup is assigned to a mute group: 1–32 or Off (no mute group). When keygroups
assigned to the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last keygroup played will silence all other keygroups in that mute
group. A mute group affects keygroup within that program only; mute groups do not affect keygroups in other programs.
To set the mute group, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 2 (MPC Renaissance) or the second Q-Link knob in
the fourth row (MPC Studio).
Layer determines how multiple samples assigned to the keygroup are played:
To set the layer playback option, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 3 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link
knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
• Cycle (Cyc): Each time the keygroup is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the
samples will cycle through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
• Velocity (Vel): The keygroup will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
• Random (Ran): Each time the keygroup is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random.
Sample determines how much of the samples assigned to the keygroup are played.
To set the playback amount of the samples, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the
fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
• One Shot (OneSht): The samples will play from start to end when a pad in the keygroup is pressed. Use
this when you want to play short sounds.
• Note On (NoteOn): The samples will play only as long as a pad in the keygroup is held down. This is better
for longer samples so you can control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad.
126
Samples
Each keygroup can trigger up to four samples, which are assigned in four individual layers. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Press F2/Samples to cycle through its three available tabs.
Important: The parameters in the Samples tabs work in conjunction with Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode). Here’s
how it works:
When working in Sample Edit Mode and using Chop Mode to divide a sample into slices for your pads, you can
convert a slice using Non-Destructive Slice or Pad Parameters.
A Non-Destructive Slice will let its keygroup to refer to that slice when you press a pad in that keygroup; the original
sample remains intact and each slice marker is like a “bookmark” for a keygroup. In Program Edit Mode, you’ll see
that the layer to which it’s assigned has its Slice setting set to the corresponding slice number in the original
sample. Playing that keygroup will cause it to refer to that slice marker like a “bookmark” instead of creating an
entirely new sample of that slice. This means that you no longer have to clutter your project with a new sample for
every slice (though you can still use this earlier method, if you prefer).
A slice converted using Pad Parameters is very similar to a non-destructive slice described above. The difference is
that in Program Edit Mode, the pads/layers they’re assigned to have their Slice setting set to Pad (instead of the slice
number), and the start and end points will correspond to the slice markers in the original sample.
The first Samples tab contains controls for its pitch, timing, and playback of the current layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point. When set to
On, the loop point is the same as the start point. When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point
and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Layer is the layer you are editing within the current keygroup: 1–4.
To select a layer, use this field.
Smpl (Sample) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer of the keygroup. Remember that the sample has to
be loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project, please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field.
127
Start and End define where the sample will start and stop playing when a pad in the keygroup is triggered.
To change the start point or end point, do either of the following:
•
Use the Start or End field (respectively).
•
Use the first or second column of Q-Link knobs (respectively). The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 14)
provide coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Note: When Loop Lock is set to ON, the loop position (as determined by the Loop field, if enabled) is the same
as the sample’s start point. When set to OFF, the loop position is independent from the start point.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly
in a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence
or unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
Loop is where the sample will loop when a pad in the keygroup is triggered. When the Loop feature is on, the region
of the sample between the loop point and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to
begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To change the loop point, use this field, or use the third column of Q-Link knobs. The top-most Q-Link knob
(15) provides coarse adjustment. The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (3) provides fine adjustment.
Slice is which slice of the sample is assigned to the keygroup. You must have already created slices in Chop Mode
(in Sample Edit Mode) to use this. 0 corresponds to All.
To select a slice to edit (after you have created slices in Chop Mode in Sample Edit Mode), use this field or turn QLink Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
All: The entire sample will play.
•
Pad: The sample will play from the Start position to the End position, described earlier. This also lets
you activate Loop (if the Sample field in the Lfo Mod tab is set to NoteOn).
•
Slice 1, 2, 3, etc.: If you have sliced the sample in Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode), you can select
which slice will play when you trigger a pad in the keygroup.
Tune is the coarse and fine tuning of the sample when played by a pad in the keygroup. The first number is coarse tuning
(-36 to +36 semitones) and the second number is fine tuning (-99 to +99 cents). 0 corresponds to no tuning adjustment.
Note: These settings will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off). Also, these are the same as Semi and
Fine on the second Samples tab.
To adjust the tuning, use these fields.
Dir (Direction) determines which direction the sample will play.
To set the playback direction, use this field to select an option:
•
Forward (Fwd): The sample will play in the normal forward direction.
•
Reverse (Rev): The sample will play in reverse.
128
Loop determines how the sample will be looped. When the Loop feature is on, the region of the sample between the
loop point (determined by the Loop field in the second row) and end point will repeat. This is useful when trying to
find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
Important: For Loop to work, you must (1) set the Sample field (in the Lfo Mod tab) to NoteOn instead of OneSht
and (2) set the Slice field (in the first Samples tab) to Pad instead of All or a slice number.
To set how the sample loops, use this field to select an option:
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward (Fwd): You can hold down a pad in the keygroup to cause that sample to repeat from the loop
point to the end of the sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Alternating (Alt): You can hold down a pad in the keygroup to cause that sample to play from the loop
point to the end of the sample and then play in reverse until it reaches the loop point again. This will
repeat as long as you are holding the pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Reverse (Rev): You can hold down a pad in the keygroup to cause that sample to play in reverse,
repeating from the end of the sample to the loop point. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
Warp determines whether or not stretching the time of the sample will change its pitch and vice versa.
When set to On, lengthening or shortening the sample (based on the BPM) will not change its pitch.
When set to Off, lengthening or shortening the sample will also change its pitch and vice versa. Use the Stretch,
BPM, and BPM Sync settings (described below) in conjunction with this feature. See the note below to learn how to
minimize CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set whether or not the sample is warped, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Stretch is the “stretch factor,” which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is set to On). See the note below to
learn how to minimize CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set the stretch factor, use this field.
BPM is the tempo used when a sample is warped (if Warp is set to On). See the note below to learn how to minimize
CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set the tempo of the sample, use this field.
BPM Sync determines whether the tempo of the sample is linked to or independent of the tempo of the sequence.
When BPM Sync and Warp are both set to On, the sample’s tempo will be “locked” to the tempo of the sequence.
When BPM Sync is set to Off but Warp is set to On, the sample will be independent of the tempo of your sequence—
use the Stretch field to lengthen or shorten a sample. See the note below to learn how to minimize CPU requirements
while using Warp.
To enable or disable BPM Sync, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
•
Avoid using extreme Stretch values.
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Tune parameter) of warped audio.
•
Avoid warping very small track regions.
•
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
•
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample. After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be
warped. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC
Help, and select MPC User Manual.
129
The second Samples tab contains controls for the pitch and volume level of each layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point.
When set to On, the loop point is the same as the start point.
When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is
the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
S1–4 (Sample 1–4) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer (1–4) of the keygroup. Remember that the
sample has to be loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project,
please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or
the Q-Link knobs in the first column on MPC Studio).
Semi is the coarse tuning of the sample on each layer: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning
adjustment. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off).
To set the coarse tuning of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (2,
6, 10, or 14 on MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the second column on MPC Studio).
Fine is the fine tuning of the sample on each layer: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is set to Off).
To set the fine tuning of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (3, 7,
11, or 15 on MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the third column on MPC Studio).
Level is the volume of the sample on each layer, enabling you to control the “balance” of the samples assigned to
the pad.
To set the volume level of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (4,
8, 12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the fourth column on MPC Studio).
130
The third Samples tab contains a control for the offset of the sample on each layer.
Loop Lock determines if the loop point of a sample layer is “linked to” or “unlinked from” the start point.
When set to On, the loop point is the same as the start point.
When set to Off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker. This is
the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
S1–4 (Sample 1–4) is the name of the sample assigned to the current layer (1–4) of the keygroup. Remember that the
sample has to be loaded into the project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project,
please see Browser.
To assign a sample, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or
the Q-Link knobs in the first column on MPC Studio).
Offset is the time offset of the sample’s playback on each layer. When this setting is a positive value, playing a pad
in the keygroup will immediately trigger the sample on that layer but at a later point in the sample (specified by this
setting). When this setting is a negative value, the sample playback on that layer will be delayed by the amount
specified by this setting.
To set the offset of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (2, 6, 10, or 14
on MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the second column on MPC Studio).
131
Panning & Velocity
The Pan Vel tab contains settings that determine the stereo placement and velocity ranges of each layer of the keygroup.
Pan is the panning position of the sample on each layer in the stereo field: 50L (left) to 50R (right). C indicates the
center position.
To set the panning position of the sample on each layer, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob
(1, 5, 9, or 13 on MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the first column on MPC Studio). If you use the
numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 100: -50 corresponds to 50L, 0 corresponds to C,
and +50 corresponds to 50R.
Low and High determine the lowest and highest velocities (respectively) that will trigger the sample on each layer. A
range from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from a pad in the keygroup,
while, for example, a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By assigning several
samples of one instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting the velocity ranges of
each layer accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a piano key pressed with low force, medium force, and high force. You
can set each sample to a layer and set the velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only
mid-range velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
To set the velocity range of the sample on each layer, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob:
for low velocities, turn Q-Link Knob 2, 6, 10, or 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second column of Q-Link knobs
(MPC Studio); for high velocities Q-Link Knob 3, 7, 11, or 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third column of Q-Link
knobs (MPC Studio).
Root is the root note of the sample. This determines which note will play the sample at its original pitch when in a
keygroup program. Sample denotes to the sample’s default pitch.
To set the root note of the sample, use this field or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (4, 8, 12, or 16 on MPC
Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the fourth column on MPC Studio). If you use the numeric keypad to change
this number, use values from 0 to 100: -50 corresponds to 50L, 0 corresponds to C, and +50 corresponds to 50R.
132
Filter Envelope
The Flt Env tab contains settings for the filter and amp envelopes that affect the keygroup.
Type determines the filter that is applied to the selected keygroup. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation
of the available filter types.
To set the filter type, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 13 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the
first row (MPC Studio).
Cutoff is the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for band-pass and bandstop filter types. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of the available filter types.
To set the filter cutoff frequency, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 14 (MPC Renaissance) or the second QLink knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
Reso (Resonance) is the emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result in a
strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
To set the filter resonance, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 15 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob
in the first row (MPC Studio).
Env (Envelope) determines the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher settings
will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes of the filter
Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Env setting and set low Atk and Dec values as well as
a medium-low Sust value of the filter envelope (Flt). This will start a sound with the filter opened and close it shortly
afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand, can sound much
more “alive” with low Env settings and a high Atk value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the higher frequencies.
To set the filter envelope amount, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 16 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth QLink knob in the first row (MPC Studio).
Kbd>Flt (KeyboardFilter) sets how much the note value will be added to the filter cutoff. This allows higher notes to
sound brighter.
To set the “keyboard to filter,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link
knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
V>Attack (VelocityAttack) determines how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad in the keygroup) to modulate
the Attack (Atk) phase for the Amp envelope.
To set the “velocity to filter attack,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 10 (MPC Renaissance) or the second
Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
V>Env (VelocityEnvelope) determines to what degree velocity information affects the amount of the filter envelope’s
effect on the cutoff frequency.
To set the “velocity to envelope amount,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the
third Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
133
V>Filter (VelocityFilter) determines to what degree the velocity of a pad modulates the cutoff frequency directly.
To set the “velocity to filter cutoff,” use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 12 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth QLink knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
The third row of parameters determine how the filter envelope affects the filter frequency over a period of time. There
are three possible sets of parameters, depending on the type of envelope:
•
AD (attack-decay) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Dec (filter decay), and Dec Type (decay type)
•
AHDS (attack-hold-decay-sustain) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Hold (filter hold), Flt Dec (filter decay),
and Flt Sust (filter sustain)
•
ADSR (attack-decay-sustain-release) envelope: Flt Atk (filter attack), Flt Dec (filter decay), Flt Sust (filter
sustain), and Flt Rel (filter release)
See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about these envelope parameters.
To adjust the filter envelope parameters, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (5–8 on MPC
Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the third row on MPC Studio).
To adjust the overall influence of the envelope on the filter frequency, use the Env field or turn Q-Link Knob 16
(MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Studio).
To set the envelope type, press F1/Master and set Sample to One Shot (O.ht), if you want to select an AD or
AHDS envelope, or Note On (N.On), if you want to use ADSR envelopes only. To select an AD or AHDS
envelope, press F4/Flt Env, select one of the eight bottom-most parameters, and then press Window. Use the
Filter Envelope AD Mode field in the screen that appears to select an AD envelope (On) or AHDS (Off), and then
press F4/Close.
The fourth row of parameters determine how the amp envelope affects the volume level over a period of time. There
are three possible sets of parameters, depending on the type of envelope:
•
AD (attack-decay) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Dec (amp decay), and Dec Type (decay type)
•
AHDS (attack-hold-decay-sustain) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Hold (amp hold), Amp Dec (amp
decay), and Amp Sust (amp sustain)
•
ADSR (attack-decay-sustain-release) envelope: Amp Atk (amp attack), Amp Dec (amp decay), Amp Sust
(amp sustain), and Amp Rel (amp release)
See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about these envelope parameters.
To adjust the amp envelope parameters, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (9–12 on
MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the fourth row on MPC Studio).
To set the envelope type, press F1/Master and set Sample to One Shot (O.ht), if you want to select an AD or
AHDS envelope, or Note On (N.On), if you want to use ADSR envelopes only. To select an AD or AHDS
envelope, press F4/Flt Env, select one of the eight bottom-most parameters, and then press Window. Use the
Volume Envelope AD Mode field in the screen that appears to select an AD envelope (On) or AHDS (Off), and
then press F4/Close.
134
LFO Modulation
The Lfo Mod tab contains settings that determine sample playback and low-frequency oscillator of the pad.
V>Pitch (VelocityPitch), V>Atk (VelocityAttack), V>Amp (VelocityAmp), and V>Pan (VelocityPanning) determine
how much the velocity affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the attack of the filter envelope (Atk), the volume level of
the filter envelope (Amp) and or the panning of the sound (Pan). When you press a pad in the keygroup softly, only
minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount also gets stronger depending on the
setting of the corresponding knob.
To adjust the velocity sensitivity of the pad, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (13–16 on
MPC Renaissance or the first row of Q-Link knobs on MPC Studio).
A low-frequency oscillator (LFO) generates a periodic waveform with an adjustable frequency and shape which can be
used for modulation purposes. The seven settings in the lower half of the screen affect the LFO applied to the keygroup.
Wave is the type of waveform the LFO uses.
To select the waveform of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link
knob in the second row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
Sine (best suited for smooth modulations)
•
Triangle (best suited for smooth modulations)
•
S&H (samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated)
•
Saw (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
•
Saw Down (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
•
Square (interesting results with hard-panning modulations)
•
Noise (generates random values and glides)
Rate is the LFO frequency when Sync is on. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete a
cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
To set the frequency of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 10 (MPC Renaissance) or the second QLink knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
Sync determines if or how the LFO’s rate is synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off.
To set the synchronization of the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 11 (MPC Renaissance) or the third
Q-Link knob in the second row (MPC Studio).
L>Pitch (LFOPitch), L>Filter (LFOFilter), L>Amp (LFOAmp), and LFO>Pan (LFOPanning) determine how
much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the
sound (Amp), and the panning of the sound (Pan). When you press a pad in the keygroup softly, only minimal
modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount also gets stronger depending on the setting
of the corresponding knob.
To adjust the LFO destinations of the pad, use these fields or turn the corresponding Q-Link knob (5–8 on
MPC Renaissance or the Q-Link knobs in the third row on MPC Studio).
135
Pitch determines the range (in semitones) of the pitch-bend wheel on a connected MIDI keyboard. (To use this
feature, you must have a MIDI device that sends pitch-bend messages connected to your computer.)
To set the range of the pitch-bend wheel, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 2 (MPC Renaissance) or the
second Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
WHL>LFO determines how much the modulation wheel on a connected MIDI keyboard affects the intensity of the LFO.
(To use this feature, you must have a MIDI device that sends modulation messages connected to your computer.)
To set how much the modulation wheel affects the LFO, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 3 (MPC
Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
AFT>FILT (AftertouchFilter Cutoff) determines how much the filter cutoff frequency is affected by aftertouch
messages from a connected MIDI keyboard. (To use this feature, you must have a MIDI device that sends aftertouch
messages connected to your computer.)
To set how much the filter cutoff frequency affects the filter cutoff, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 4
(MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
136
Effects
Effects shows the insert effects and send effect levels for the keygroup. You can select up to four insert effects for
each keygroup. Additionally, each keygroup can be sent to up to four return channels, each of which can have up to
four insert effects of their own. Their audio will be routed through the insert effects on those returns, and the
processed audio will be sent to a master output.
Please see General Features > Effects to learn more about using insert and send effects.
Important: When using keygroup insert effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if you
load insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that range as well.
Inserts determines whether insert effects are activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) for the keygroup.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Insert 1–4 are the four available slots for insert effects on that keygroup.
To load an effect, select an Insert field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons. In the Select Effect screen that
appears, select an effect. Press F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select an Insert field with an effect, and press Window. In the screen
that appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears, press
F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set the Inserts field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Send 1–4 are the audio signal levels that the keygroup sends to the four return channels, each of which can have up
to four insert effects—these are send effects. The send effects will then send the audio to the assigned master
output at the designated return levels. You can select up to four send effects for each keygroup, but remember that
they will be applied to that keygroup only.
To adjust the send levels, turn their corresponding Q-Link knobs (4, 8, 12, or 16 on MPC Renaissance or the
Q-Link knobs in the fourth column on MPC Studio).
Important: To edit the send effects, use the Channel Mixer. See Channel Mixer > Returns to learn more how to
do this.
137
Clip Programs
When using clip programs, Program Edit Mode lets you assign a sample (a loop called a clip) to each pad in a single
bank. You can also edit various settings to determine how each pad launches its assigned clip.
To select a pad, press it. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately.
To view a specific tab of parameters, press F1/Program or F2/Pad. The Program tab is where you assign
clips to pads (see Program in this section). The Pad tab is where you determine how each pad plays its clip (see
Pad in this section).
Below is a brief step-by-step process so you can get familiar with setting up a clip. Continue reading the rest of this
chapter to learn how to use the parameters in this window.
To assign a clip:
1. Press F2/Pad, and set the Sample field at the top of the screen to the desired clip. For example, start with a
four-bar drum loop.
2. Note that the Tempo field has a value, which is automatically detected.
Set Warp to On if it is not already. The Warp function keeps the loop in time with the sequence tempo or the
master tempo.
3. If you need to edit the loop’s tempo manually, use the Tempo field.
4. Set Fade to On if it is not already. This applies a very small fade-in and fade-out at the start and end of the clip
to prevent “clicks” and glitches that can occur if the start or end points are not at “zero-crossings.”
5. If you need to edit the loop’s pitch manually, use the Semi and/or Fine fields, or turn Q-Link Knobs 1 and/or 2
(MPC Renaissance) or the first and second Q-Link knobs in the fourth row (MPC Studio), respectively. These
adjust the pitch by semitones and cents. You will hear the tuning adjustments in real time.
138
These are the buttons under the screen for clip programs:
F1
Program
Press this button to view the Program tab, described here.
F2
Pad
Press this button to view the Pad tab, described here.
You can edit one pad, multiple pads, or all pads of a clip program simultaneously while in Program Edit Mode.
To select how many pads and which pad/pads you are editing, select any parameter in Program Edit Mode,
and then press Window. In the Edit Zones screen that appears, set the Edit Mode field:
•
Current: Only the currently selected pad can be edited.
•
Multiple: All selected pads can be edited simultaneously.
•
All: All pads can be edited simultaneously.
Tip: You can immediately select or deselect multiple pads while on any tab in Program Edit Mode (regardless of
the current Edit Mode setting). To do this, press Shift and each desired pad. Edit Mode will automatically
change to the corresponding setting.
Program
The Program tab enables you set the program’s overall tuning and quantization.
Semi is the coarse tuning of the program: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning adjustment.
To set the coarse tuning of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 9 (MPC Renaissance) or the
second Q-Link knob in the first column (MPC Studio).
Fine is the fine tuning of the program: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
To set the fine tuning of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 5 (MPC Renaissance) or the third QLink knob in the first column (MPC Studio).
Launch is the quantization of the program in bars or subdivisions of a bar. When you launch any clips in the program,
it will use this quantization. None denotes no quantization; when you launch a clip, it will start playing immediately.
To set the quantization of the program, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 1 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth
Q-Link knob in the first column (MPC Studio).
139
Pad
The Pad tab contains settings to assign a clip to each pad and set its timing, tuning, and playback behavior.
Sample is the name of the sample assigned to the pad. Remember that the sample has to be loaded into the
project’s sample pool beforehand. To learn how to load samples into a project, please see Browser. Select None to
clear the pad’s assignment.
To assign a sample to the current pad, use this field.
Warp determines whether or not stretching the time of the sample will change its pitch and vice versa.
When set to On, lengthening or shortening the sample (based on the BPM) will not change its pitch.
When set to Off, lengthening or shortening the sample will also change its pitch and vice versa. Use the BPM setting
(described below) in conjunction with this feature. See the note below to learn how to minimize CPU requirements
while using Warp.
To set whether or not the sample is warped, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
•
Avoid using extreme Stretch values.
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Tune parameter) of warped audio.
•
Avoid warping very small track regions.
•
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
•
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample. After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be
warped. To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC
Help, and select MPC User Manual.
Tempo is the tempo used when a sample is warped (if Warp is set to On). See the note above to learn how to minimize
CPU requirements while using Warp.
To set the tempo of the sample, use this field.
Play determines how the clip is played.
To set how the clip is played, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 6 (MPC Renaissance) or the second Q-Link
knob in the third row (MPC Studio) to select an option:
•
One Shot: When you press the pad, the entire clip will play from start to end and then stop.
•
Toggle: When you press the pad, the entire clip will play from start to end and loop indefinitely. Pressing it
again—or launching another in the same mute group—will stop its playback. This is the most common usage.
140
Launch is the quantization of the pad in bars or subdivisions of a bar. When you launch this clip, it will use this
quantization instead of the program’s quantization (set in the Program tab). When set to PGM, the pad will use the
program’s quantization (this is the default setting). None denotes no quantization; when you launch a clip, it will start
playing immediately.
To set the quantization of the pad, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 7 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link
knob in the third row (MPC Studio).
Dir (Direction) determines which direction the sample will play.
To set the playback direction, use this field to select an option:
•
Forward (Fwd): The sample will play in the normal forward direction.
•
Reverse (Rev): The sample will play in reverse.
Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 8 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the third row (MPC Studio).
Semi is the coarse tuning of the pad: -36 to +36 semitones. 0 corresponds to no coarse-tuning adjustment.
To set the coarse tuning of the pad, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 1 (MPC Renaissance) or the first QLink knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
Fine is the fine tuning of the pad: -99 to +99 cents. 0 corresponds to no fine-tuning adjustment.
To set the fine tuning of the pad, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 2 (MPC Renaissance) or the second QLink knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
Mute Grp determines if the pad is assigned to a mute group: 1–32 or Off (no mute group). When pads assigned to
the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A mute
group affects pads within that program only; mute groups do not affect pads in other programs.
By default, each column of pads is assigned to the same mute group. This means only one pad from each column
can be playing its clip at a time. You can use the Mute Group field to configure this any way you like, though.
To set the mute group, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 3 (MPC Renaissance) or the third Q-Link knob in the
fourth row (MPC Studio).
Fade determines whether or not a very small fade-in and fade-out are applied at the start and end of the clip. This
feature helps prevent “clicks” and glitches that can occur if the start or end points are not placed at the waveform’s
“zero-crossings.”
To set whether or not the sample uses a fade-in and fade-out, set this field to On or Off (respectively) or turn
Q-Link Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth row (MPC Studio).
The start and end points of the clip assigned to the pad are not shown in the screen, but you can still use the MPC
hardware to adjust them.
To set the clip’s start point, use Q-Link Knobs 9–12 (MPC Renaissance) or the Q-Link knobs in the first row
(MPC Studio) to adjust the start point with varying degrees of resolution.
To set the clip’s end point, use Q-Link Knobs 13–16 (MPC Renaissance) or the Q-Link knobs in the second
row (MPC Studio) to adjust the end point with varying degrees of resolution.
141
Plugin Programs
When using plugin programs, Program Edit Mode shows an overview of all available plugin parameters with an
adjustable parameter for each one.
The buttons under the screen will vary depending on the plugin. Press each one to access a tab of parameters that
you can adjust using the data dial, –/+ buttons, or corresponding Q-Link knob. Some of the fields may not contain a
parameter.
To select preset within your plugin:
1. Select the Program field at the top of the screen, and press Window.
2. In the screen that appears, select the desired preset, and press F5/Select to continue or F4/Close to return to
the previous screen.
3. You can press F2/AutoSel to activate or deactivate automatic selection, which will automatically load each
preset as you move through the list.
To assign a parameter to one of the fields, use the MPC software.
Note: To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help,
and select MPC User Manual.
142
MIDI Programs
When using MIDI programs, Program Edit Mode shows an overview of all available MIDI CCs with an adjustable
parameter for each one.
The buttons under the screen correspond to six tabs. Press each one to access 16 MIDI CCs on each tab that you
can adjust using the data dial, –/+ buttons, corresponding Q-Link knob, or numeric keypad.
To assign a parameter to one of the fields, use the MPC software.
Note: To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help,
and select MPC User Manual.
CV Programs
When using CV programs, Program Edit Mode shows an overview of all eight CV outputs with an adjustable voltage
parameter for each one.
The buttons under the screen correspond to six tabs. You can press each one to access a tab, but only the first tab
(Page1) contains the eight adjustable voltage parameters that you can adjust using the data dial, –/+ buttons,
corresponding Q-Link knob, or numeric keypad.
To assign a parameter to one of the fields, use the MPC software.
Note: To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help,
and select MPC User Manual.
143
Anatomy of an Envelope
An envelope creates a variable control signal. It can be used, for instance, to modulate the filter settings of a sound
over a given period of time.
Drum programs and keygroup programs can use three types of envelopes: AD (attack-decay), AHDS (attack-holddecay-sustain), or ADSR (attack-decay-sustain-release).
For drum programs, when Sample (in the Lfo Mod tab) is set to One Shot (OneSht), it will use ADSR envelopes
only. When set to Note On (NoteOn), it can use an AD or ADHS envelope. See Program Edit Mode > Drum
Programs > Filter Envelope and LFO Modulation to learn how to change the envelope.
For keygroup programs when Sample (in the Master tab) is set to One Shot (O.ht), it can use an AD or AHDS
envelopes. When set to Note On (N.On), it will use ADSR envelopes only. See Program Edit Mode > Keygroup
Programs > Filter Envelope and Master to learn how to change the envelope.
With AD envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time you have defined with the attack (Atk), the sample
volume rises to its maximum value.
2. The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained until its decay (Dec)
phase, when the sample’s volume will gradually drop to zero over the set
duration. The decay can function in one of two ways:
•
Decay From Start (Strt): The volume will start decreasing
immediately after reaching its maximum level.
•
Decay From End (End): The maximum volume will be maintained
for a hold phase until it reaches the decay phase.
With AHDS envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time you have defined with the attack (Atk), the
sample volume rises to its maximum value.
2. The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained during the Hold phase.
3. During the decay (Dec) phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop to
the Sustain (Sust) level.
4. The sample’s volume will stay at the sustain level (Sust) until the pad is
released.
With ADSR envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time defined by the attack (Atk), the sample volume
rises to its maximum value.
2. During the decay (Dec) phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop to
the Sustain (Sust) level.
3. The sample’s volume will stay at the Sustain (Sust) level until the Release
(Rel) phase begins.
4. The sample’s volume will drop to “zero” over the duration set by Release
(Rel).
144
Browser
The Browser lets you navigate your computer’s internal hard disk to load samples, sequences, songs, etc. Using
filter buttons and user-definable folders, you can easily adapt it to your preferred workflow. You can also audition
(preview) your samples before loading them.
To enter the Browser, press Browser.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F2
Auto
Press this button to enable or disable the audition function. When enabled, each sample file
will automatically play when it is first selected.
F3
Play
Press this button to play the sample.
F4
Volume
Press and hold this button to show the Audition Volume field, which you can use to adjust
how loudly samples play in the Browser.
F5
Set
Press this button to assign the current location to a folder button. Use the data dial or –/+
buttons to select one of Folders 1–5 and press F5/Do It to confirm your choice or
F4/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
F6
Open
When a folder is selected, press this button to enter it. Alternatively, press the right cursor.
F6
Load
When a file is selected, press this button to load it.
If the file is a project, press F4/OK to confirm your choice or F3/Cancel to return to the
previous screen.
If the file is a sequence, press F5/Do It to confirm your choice or F4/Cancel to return to
the previous screen.
If the file is a sample (in a supported format), it will be loaded immediately to your
project’s sample pool.
145
To enter a folder, press F6/Load. You can also use the folder buttons to jump immediately to those pre-assigned
file paths (see below to learn how to assign these file paths):
Folder 1: Shift+Project/Folder 1.
Folder 2: Shift+Sequence/Folder 2.
Folder 3: Shift+Program/Folder 3.
Folder 4: Shift+Sample/Folder 4.
Folder 5: Shift+No Filter/Folder 5.
To move up one folder level, press the left cursor.
To move through a list, turn the data dial, use the up or down cursors, or use the –/+ buttons.
To load a selected file, press F6/Load.
If the file is a project, press F4/OK to confirm your choice or F3/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
If the file is a sequence, press F5/Do It to confirm your choice or F4/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
If the file is a sample (in a supported format), it will be loaded immediately to your project’s sample pool.
You can play a sound file to preview it before loading it into your project. The Audition feature lets you do this
automatically as you move through lists of files.
To play a selected sound, press and hold F3/Play.
To enable or disable the audition function, press F2/Auto. When enabled, each sample file will automatically
play when it is first selected.
To set the volume level of sounds that play in the Browser, press and hold F4/Volume. Use the numeric
keypad, data dial, or –/+ buttons to change the number of Audition Volume in the screen that appears.
To get the most efficient use of the Browser, set the file paths to your favorite drive locations first. There are five
folder buttons labeled 1–5 in the upper-right corner. You can set these to be shortcuts to five locations on your
MPC hardware’s internal drive and/or any connected storage devices, giving you quick access to your files.
To assign the current location to a folder button, press F5/Set. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select one
of Folders 1–5 and press F5/Do It to confirm your choice or F4/Cancel to return to the previous screen.
To enter a shortcut folder, press the corresponding combination of buttons below:
Folder 1: Shift+Project/Folder 1.
Folder 2: Shift+Sequence/Folder 2.
Folder 3: Shift+Program/Folder 3.
Folder 4: Shift+Sample/Folder 4.
Folder 5: Shift+No Filter/Folder 5.
146
Sample Record Mode
Sample Record Mode lets you record audio samples to use in your projects.
Important: To record any audio, you need to connect an audio source to your MPC hardware or to your computer’s
audio interface.
Important: The Input, Channel, Monitor, Threshold, and effects (Fx) are the same for both Sample Record Mode
and the Looper.
To enter Sample Record Mode, press Shift+Sample Edit/Sample Rec.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen during normal operation:
F1
Sampler/Looper
Press this button to switch between Sample Record Mode and the Looper.
F2
Sample/Slice/
Pad Tap/Pad Hold
Press this button to cycle through the four sampling methods: Sample, Slice,
Pad Tap, and Pad Hold.
F3
Peak
Press this button to reset the peak indicator on the input level meter.
F4
Fx
Press this button to show and edit the sampler’s insert effects.
F6
Record
Press this button to record-arm the sampler.
These are the buttons under the screen when the sampler is record-armed:
F4
Fx
Press this button to show and edit the sampler’s insert effects.
F5
Cancel
Press this button to record-disarm the sampler.
F6
Start
Press this button to start recording in the sampler.
To set up the sampler before recording:
1. Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and speakers, headphones, and/or monitors before
you make any connections to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2. Connect a synthesizer or other line-level audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware.
3. Turn the Rec Gain knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in
the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. Set the recording controls as desired (described in this chapter).
5. Press F6/Record to record-arm the sampler.
You can record using four different methods: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, or Pad Hold, all described later in this
chapter. The following controls are present regardless of which method you use.
To select a sampling method, press F2 to cycle through them: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, Pad Hold.
147
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
Inserts determines whether insert effects are activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) for the sampler and Looper.
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the effects cannot be “removed”
from the sound later. Learn more about how effects work in General Features > Effects.
To activate or deactivate the insert effects, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
To load, activate, deactivate, or edit the insert effects, press F4/Fx.
Input determines the source of the recording in Sample Record Mode (and the Looper). You can select an external
audio signal (In 1,2–In 31,32) or an internal signal (Resample).
Tip: Because resampling does not record from an external source, it does not require an audio connection and can
record without any loss in audio quality. Furthermore, you can resample two or more samples at once by pressing
the corresponding pads simultaneously.
To set the input, use this field. All options are stereo pairs. If you want to record a mono signal, use the Channel
field to determine which one is the source.
To set which channel is the source, use the Channel field to select the left channel only (LEFT), right channel
only (RIGHT), or both channels (STEREO).
Channel determines which channel you will record from the source while using Sample Record Mode (and the
Looper): the left channel only (LEFT), right channel only (RIGHT), or both channels (STEREO).
To set which channel is the source, use this field.
Monitor determines whether or not input monitoring is on or off while using Sample Record Mode (and the Looper).
When on, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the sampler, ensuring zero latency.
When off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is processed in the sampler, so there may be
some latency, but you will hear the audio source as it sounds in the recording.
To activate or deactivate input monitoring, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of the audio sources.
Threshold indicates the minimum audio signal level required to start the sampler (or Looper) when it is recordarmed. In other words, when record-armed, the sampler will automatically start recording when the incoming audio
signal is louder than this threshold. The T marker under the level meters is a visual indication of this setting.
Set this level carefully. If you set it too high, the recording may not start when you play the input source, or the start
of the material you wanted to record may be missing. If you set it too low, the recording may start too early, before
you play the external source. Use the level meter to find the appropriate setting.
To set the threshold, use this field, or Q-Link Knob 1 (MPC Renaissance) or the first Q-Link knob (MPC Studio).
Time determines the maximum sampling time up to 19 minutes and 59 seconds (19:59) per sample. We recommend
setting these to values that roughly match your estimated recording duration.
To set the sampling time, use this field or turn Q-Link Knobs 3 and 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the third and
fourth Q-Link knobs (MPC Studio) to set the Minutes and Seconds (respectively). If you use the numeric
keypad to enter a time, enter the total number of seconds (e.g., enter 90 instead of 1:30).
Output determines if the recorded sample will be monaural (Mono) or binaural (Stereo).
To set whether the recorded sample will be monaural or binaural, use this field.
148
The Left/Right level meters shows the current input gain level of the incoming audio signal. The T marker under the
level meters is a visual indication of the Threshold setting.
You can record using four different methods: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, or Pad Hold, all described later in this chapter.
To select a sampling method, press F2 to cycle through them: Sampler, Slice, Pad Tap, Pad Hold.
Peak allows you to reset the peak indicator when the input level meter has exceeded the maximum volume level.
To reset the peak indicator, press F3/Peak.
Fx shows any enabled or disabled effects for Sample Record Mode (and the Looper).
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the effects cannot be “removed”
from the sound later. Learn more about how effects work in General Features > Effects.
To load, activate, deactivate, or edit the insert effects, press F4/Fx. Inserts 1–4 show the insert effects
loaded to Sample Record Mode (and the Looper).
To load an effect, use its Insert field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears. Press
F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears,
press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set the Inserts field to ON or OFF (respectively).
To return to the previous screen, press F4/Fx.
Press F6/Record to record-arm the sampler. The button will then change to Start and Waiting for Signal will appear
in the screen.
To start recording, start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the Threshold setting, or press
F6/Start to start recording manually. For reference, the Sample Length counter shows you the length of your
sample during the recording procedure.
To disarm the sampler instead, tap F5/Cancel.
149
Sample
Using this method, you can insert slice markers directly in your sample as you record it.
Slice markers divide the sample into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in the Chop Mode of
Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode for more information). This is useful when working with a
long sample with different sounds throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To select the Sample method, press F2 to cycle through the options until Sample appears in the button.
To start recording, start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the Threshold setting, or press F6/Start
to start recording manually. For reference, the Sample Length counter shows you the length of your sample during the
recording procedure.
To disarm the sampler instead, tap F5/Cancel.
To stop recording, press F6/Stop.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, press Slice+ (in the lower-right corner) as the sample
records. Each time you press it, a slice marker will be placed at that location.
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
Name is the name of the new sample.
Prg is the program to which the sample will be assigned.
To assign the sample to a program, use this field. Select <none> to save it to the project without assigning it
to a program.
150
Assign To Pad determines the pad (in the program shown in the Prg field) to which the sample will be assigned.
To assign the sample to a pad within the program, use this field or press the pad. Select Off to assign it to the
program without assigning it to a pad.
Root Note is the root note of the sample. This determines which note will play the sample at its original pitch when in
a keygroup program.
To set the root note, use this field.
F1/Save saves the sample.
F3/Play plays the sample.
F4/Discard erases the recorded sample and returns to the previous screen.
F5/Keep saves the recorded sample with the settings in this window and returns to the previous screen.
F6/Edit opens Sample Edit Mode so you can edit the recorded sample (recommended, see Sample Edit Mode for
more information).
If you recorded a sample while a sequence was playing, the Keep or Discard Sample window will show a few more
options if you set Assign To Pad to a pad.
Add Event determines whether or not the sample will be added to the sequence you played.
To select whether or not the sample is added, set this field to Yes or No (respectively).
At determines where you want the event to start. When set to Start, the sample will be a note event at the start of the
currently playing sequence. When set to Trigger, the sample will be a note event where you began recording it in the
currently playing sequence.
To set where the event will start, set this field to Start or Trigger.
Track is the track that will contain the new event.
To set which track will contain the new event, use this field.
F1/Save saves the sample.
F3/Play plays the sample.
F4/Discard erases the recorded sample and returns to the previous screen.
F5/Keep saves the recorded sample with the settings in this window and returns to the previous screen.
F6/Edit opens Sample Edit Mode so you can edit the recorded sample (recommended, see Sample Edit Mode for
more information).
151
Slice
Using this method, the pads correspond to slices of the currently recorded sample. Slice markers divide the sample
into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in the Chop Mode of Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit
Mode > Chop Mode for more information). This is useful when working with a long sample with different sounds
throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To select the Slice method, press F2 to cycle through the options until Slice appears in the button.
To start recording, start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the Threshold setting, or press F6/Start
to start recording manually. For reference, the Sample Length counter shows you the length of your sample during the
recording procedure.
To disarm the sampler instead, tap F5/Cancel.
To stop recording, tap Stop under the Sample Length counter.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, press any pad as the sample records. Each time you press
it, a slice marker will be placed at that location.
The number of the pad that flashes red is the number of the slice marker that will be inserted next. The numbers of
the pads that are lit yellow are the numbers of the slice markers that are already inserted.
When you are done recording, you can name the sample and create a new program using the slices.
To stop recording, press F6/Stop.
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
152
Create New Prg determines how each pad’s layer settings will be set when each slice is assigned to it (see Program
Edit Mode to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
Off will not create a program, but the slices will still be added to your project’s sample pool.
With Non-Destructive Slices will create a new program with each pad’s Slice setting set to the slice number.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode >
Chop Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
With Pad Parameters will create a new program with each pad’s Slice setting set to Pad. The pad Start and
End parameters will be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop position parameter will
be set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated. This is identical to how you can assign samples in
Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
F1/Save saves the sample.
F3/Play plays the sample.
F4/Discard erases the recorded sample and returns to the previous screen.
F5/Create saves the recorded sample with the settings in this window and returns to the previous screen.
F6/Edit opens Sample Edit Mode so you can edit the recorded sample (recommended, see Sample Edit Mode for
more information).
Pad Tap
Important: This mode works for drum programs only; you must select a drum program before using this mode.
Otherwise, this feature will not do anything, even though it may appear to work.
With this method, pressing a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad (make sure you are
using the desired program before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright yellow. Pads
without samples are lit dim yellow.
To select the Pad Tap method, press F2 to cycle through the options until Pad Tap appears in the button.
To start recording to a pad, press it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will flash red. If you press a new
pad, the recording will stop on the previous pad, which will turn green, and start on the new pad, which will flash red.
Note: If you start recording by pressing F6/Record—or if the volume exceeds the level of the threshold slider—the
sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording to a pad, press the currently recording pad, which is flashing red. The sample will continue
recording. You can start recording on another pad at any time.
To stop recording, press F6/Stop.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have pressed during recording:
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
will have its pad Start and End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
will have its Loop position set to the slice’s start point but with Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
153
Pad Hold
Important: This mode works for drum programs only; you must select a drum program before using this mode.
Otherwise, this feature will not do anything, even though it may appear to work.
With this method, pressing and holding a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad (make sure
you are using the desired program before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright yellow. Pads
without samples are lit dim yellow.
To select the Pad Hold method, press F2 to cycle through the options until Pad Hold appears in the button.
To start recording to a pad, press and hold it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will light red.
Note: If you start recording by pressing F6/Record—or if the volume exceeds the level of the threshold slider—the
sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording, release the pad. The pad will light green, and the sample will continue recording. You can start
recording on another pad at any time.
To stop recording, press F6/Stop.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have pressed during recording:
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
will have its pad Start and End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
will have its Loop position set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
154
Looper
The Looper lets you record and overdub audio in real time—a great tool for live performance as well as spontaneous
moments in the studio. You can export the loop as a sample to use in your project.
Important: The Input, Channel, Monitor, Threshold, and effects (Fx) are the same for both Sample Record Mode
and the Looper. The Input and Threshold settings, however, are shown in Sample Record Mode only. See Modes >
Sample Record Mode to learn how to use these settings.
To enter the Looper, press Shift+Sample Edit/Sample Rec to enter Sample Record Mode, and then press F1/Sampler
to switch to the Looper.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Looper/Sampler
Press this button to switch between the Looper and Sample Record Mode.
F2
Export
Press this button to export the contents of the Looper as a sample.
F3
Reverse
Press this button to reverse the playback of the Looper.
F4
Play
Press this button to play the Looper.
F5
Replace
Press this button to overwrite the contents of the Looper while recording.
F6
Overdub
Press this button to keep the contents of the Looper while recording, essentially
adding more layers to it.
Shift+F5
Fx
Press these buttons to show and edit the Looper’s insert effects.
Shift+F6
Clear
Press this button to erase the contents of the Looper.
Below is a brief step-by-step process so you can get started quickly. Continue reading the rest of this chapter to
learn how to use the Looper in different cases.
To get started using the Looper:
1. Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and speakers/headphones/monitors before you
make any connections to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2. Connect a synthesizer, audio player, etc. to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware or computer interface.
3. Turn the Rec Gain knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in
the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. Set the recording controls as desired (described in this chapter).
5. Set Record To to Overdub.
6. Press F6/Record to start recording in the Looper.
155
7. Play your audio source. The Looper will start recording immediately when the input level reaches the threshold
value. Alternatively, Press F4/Play to manually start recording.
Each time the Looper repeats, its contents are being overdubbed—a new layer of audio will be added each time
you let the Looper repeat as it records.
Tip: You can record a loop while playing a sequence in the background for reference.
8. To stop recording, Pres F4/Play.
To export your loop as a sample, press F2/Export to show the Export Loop as Sample screen.
To clear the contents of the Looper, press Shift+F6/Clear.
Important: The Input and Threshold settings the same for both Sample Record Mode and the Looper, but they are
shown in Sample Record Mode only. See Modes > Sample Record Mode to learn how to use these settings.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
Gain is the output signal level of the Looper.
To set the output signal level, use this field or turn Q-Link Knob 4 (MPC Renaissance) or the fourth Q-Link knob
(MPC Studio).
Bars is the length of the loop in bars. Regardless of how much or how little audio you record, this is how long your
loop will be.
To set the number of bars, use this field.
Sync determines whether or not the Looper is synchronized with sequence playback. When set to ON, the looper will
stay in step with your current sequence. When you play or record into the Looper, it will wait until the sequence starts
playing Bar 1 to start. When set to OFF, the looper will remain independent of any sequence playback.
To synchronize or un-synchronize the Looper with sequence playback, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Rec To determines the recording behavior:
PLAY: Before recording, you must first press F4/Play, which will start playing the Looper.
OVERDUB: Before recording, you must first press F6/Overdub to record-arm the Looper.
Monitor determines whether or not input monitoring is on or off while using the Looper (and Sample Record Mode).
When on, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the Looper, ensuring zero latency.
When off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is processed in the Looper, so there may be
some latency, but you will hear the audio source as it sounds in the recording.
To activate or deactivate input monitoring, set this field to ON or OFF (respectively).
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of the audio sources.
Ch determines which channel you will record from the source while using the Looper (and Sample Record Mode): the
left channel only (LEFT), right channel only (RIGHT), or both channels (STEREO).
To set which channel is the source, use this field.
156
The waveform display is a visual representation of the contents of the Looper.
The level meters on either side of the waveform display show the audio signal level at the beginning and end of the loop.
The icon next to the “in” level meter indicates whether the Looper is paused (), playing (), or recording ().
Fx shows any enabled or disabled effects for the Looper (and Sample Record Mode).
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the effects cannot be “removed”
from the sound later. Learn more about how effects work in General Features > Effects.
To load, activate, deactivate, or edit the insert effects, press Shift+F5/Fx. Inserts 1–4 show the insert effects
loaded to the Looper (and Sample Record Mode).
To load an effect, use its Insert field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears. Press
F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that appears,
press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect. Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate all four insert effects, set the Inserts field to ON or OFF (respectively).
To return to the previous screen, press F4/Fx.
Peak allows you to reset the peak indicator when the input level meter has exceeded the maximum volume level.
To reset the peak indicator, press F3/Peak.
157
To record with the Looper:
Important:
To record without erasing any audio you’ve already recorded in the loop, press F6/Overdub.
To overwrite the audio you’ve already recorded, press F5/Replace.
If Rec To is set to PLAY:
To start recording, press F5/Replace or F6/Overdub as the loop is playing. The Looper will start recording
immediately.
To stop recording, press F5/Replace or F6/Overdub again. The Looper will stop recording but continue
playing.
To stop playback and recording, press F4/Play.
If Rec To is set to OVERDUB:
To start recording, press F4/Play.
If Sync is set to OFF, you can also play your audio source so that the input level reaches the threshold value.
If Sync is set to ON, you can also press the Play or Play Start button to start playing a sequence;
recording will start when the sequence starts on Bar 1.
To stop recording, press F6/Overdub. The Looper will stop recording but continue playing.
To stop playback and recording, press F4/Play or press Stop to stop sequence playback.
To play or stop the loop (without recording), press F4/Play.
To reverse loop playback, press F3/Reverse. If Sync is set to ON, playback will reverse once the Looper’s playhead
reaches the end of the loop. If Sync is set to OFF, playback will reverse immediately.
To erase the contents of the Looper immediately, press Shift+F6/Clear.
To export the loop as a sample, press F2/Export to show the Export Loop as a Sample screen.
Name is the name of the new sample.
Prg is the program to which the sample will be assigned.
To assign the sample to a program, use this field. Select <none> to save it to the project without assigning
it to a program.
Assign To Pad determines the pad (in the program shown in the Prg field) to which the sample will be assigned.
To assign the sample to a pad within the program, use this field or press the pad. Select Off to assign it
to the program without assigning it to a pad.
Root Note is the root note of the sample. This determines which note will play the sample at its original pitch
when in a keygroup program.
To set the root note, use this field.
F1/Save saves the loop.
F3/Play plays the loop.
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen.
F5/Do It saves the recorded loop with the settings in this window and returns to the previous screen. When your
loop is done exporting, it will be added to your project’s sample pool and will be assigned to the program and
pad you selected (if any).
F6/Edit opens Sample Edit Mode so you can edit the recorded loop (recommended, see Sample Edit Mode for
more information).
158
Pad Mixer
In the Pad Mixer, you can set a program’s levels, stereo panning, routing, and effects.
This mode appears differently for each type of program:
For drum programs, this mode shows settings for each individual pad (of 128).
For keygroup programs, this mode shows settings for each individual keygroup (up to 128).
For clip programs, this mode shows settings for each individual clip.
For MIDI programs, plugin programs, and CV programs, this mode is unavailable.
For more information on how these programs differ, please see General Features > Programs.
Important: The Prog Mix button on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Pad Mixer in the MPC software. This is
due to the functionality changing as the software has evolved.
To enter the Pad Mixer, press Prog Mix.
The Pad Mixer works like an audio mixer with various settings for each pad, shown in a 4x4 array. All of their
functionality is identical. The pad number is displayed in each field.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Level
Press this button to view the levels of the pads. See Level to learn more.
F2
Pan
Press this button to view the panning of the pads. See Pan to learn more.
F3
Mute
Press this button to view the mute status of the pads. See Mute to learn more.
F4
Send
Press this button to cycle through the four tabs of send effect levels of the pads. See
Send to learn more.
F5
Insert
Press this button to cycle through the four tabs of insert effects loaded to the pads. See
Insert to learn more.
F6
Route
Press this button to view the routing of the pads. See Route to learn more.
159
To select a pad, press its corresponding pad. Alternatively, use the Pad field in the upper-left corner.
To view more pads, use the Pad Bank buttons.
To show the name of the sample assigned to each pad instead of the setting, press and hold Shift. The sample on
the first layer of each pad will appear in place of the corresponding settings. Release Shift to return to the normal view.
Program is the program whose pads you are viewing and editing. Only one type of program will be available in this
field at a time (e.g., if Track is set to a track using a drum program, Program can be set to a drum program only).
Remember that only drum programs, keygroup programs, or clip programs will display properly in the Pad Mixer.
To select a program, use this field.
Track is the track whose program you are viewing and editing. This also determines the type of program you can
select with the Program field (e.g., if Track is set to a track using a drum program, Program can be set to a drum
program only).
To select a track, use this field.
To view each setting in all 16 fields, press the corresponding button (F1–F6) under the screen. You can press F4/Send
or F5/Insert multiple times to cycle through the four available slots for each.
The following controls and tabs are available as indicated:
Level
When the Level tab is selected, the 16 fields show the volume level of each pad in dB.
To adjust the level of a pad, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
Pan
When the Pan tab is selected, the 16 fields show the panning (stereo placement) of each pad. 50 L (left) to
50 R (right). C indicates the center position.
To adjust the panning of a pad, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob. If
you use the numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 100: 0 corresponds to 50 L,
50 corresponds to C, and 100 corresponds to 50 R.
Mute
When the Mute tab is selected, the 16 fields show the mute status of each pad.
To mute or unmute a pad, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
Send
When the Send tab is selected, the 16 fields show one of the four send levels of each pad: 0–100. You can
select up to four send effects for each pad. You can use various effects in the MPC software as well as
other VST and AU plugins installed on your computer.
Important: To use a send effect, you have to load an effect into the corresponding send effect slot in the
Channel Mixer. Please see General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about send effects.
To adjust the send level of a pad, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
To cycle through the four send effect levels, press F4/Send.
160
Insert
When the Insert tab is selected, the 16 fields show one of the four insert effects of each pad. You can select
up to four insert effects for each pad. You can use various effects in the MPC software as well as other VST
and AU plugins installed on your computer.
Important:
When using keygroup insert effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if you load
insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that range as well.
If a routing is set to anything other than Program, then a program insert effect will not be applied to that pad
or keygroup.
Please see General Features > Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about insert effects.
To select an insert effect for a pad, use its corresponding field.
To cycle through the four insert effect slots, press F4/Send.
To load an effect, use its corresponding field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears.
Press F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, turn its corresponding Q-Link knob. Alternatively, select its Insert
field, and press Window. In the screen that appears, press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect.
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Route
When the Route tab is selected, the 16 fields show the output of each pad: Program, Submix (Sub) 1–8,
Out 1,2–31,32, or Out 1–32. Usually, this is set to Program.
Note: When set to a mono channel, the left and right channels are summed post-pan knob. If the pan knob
is set to the center position, the left and right channels will be summed and padded. If the pan knob is set to
the maximum left or right positions, only the respective channel will be sent to the output.
To select the output of a pad, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
161
Channel Mixer
In the Channel Mixer, you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings for your MIDI and audio tracks,
programs, returns, submixes, and master outputs.
This mode appears differently for each type of “channel”: MIDI Tracks (Tracks), Audio Tracks, Programs, Returns,
Submixes, and Master Outputs (Outputs).
Important: Track Mix (or Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix) on your MPC hardware corresponds to the Channel Mixer in
the MPC software. This is due to the functionality changing as the software has evolved.
To open the Channel Mixer, press Shift+Prog Mix/Track Mix.
The Channel Mixer works like an audio mixer with various settings for each channel, shown in a 4x4 array. Their
functionality is mostly identical. The name of the track, program, or channel is displayed at the top of each one.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Level
Press this button to view the levels of the pads. See the description here to learn more.
F2
Pan
Press this button to view the panning of the pads. See the description here to learn more.
F3
Mute
Press this button to view the mute status of the pads. See the description here to learn more.
F4
Send
Press this button to cycle through the four tabs of send effect levels of the pads. See the
description here to learn more.
F5
Insert
Press this button to cycle through the four tabs of insert effects loaded to the pads. See the
description here to learn more.
F6
Route
Press this button to view the routing of the pads. See the description here to learn more.
Mixer is the type of channels whose settings you are viewing and editing: MIDI Tracks (Tracks), Audio Tracks,
Programs, Returns, Submixes, and Master Outputs (Outputs). Each page has slight differences, described in
each section of this chapter.
To select the type of channel, use this field.
162
The field in the upper-right corner determines the channels whose settings you are viewing and editing: 1–16, 17–32,
etc. The name of the field varies depending on the type of channel. You cannot change this value for returns,
submixes, or master outputs (pairs) because there are 16 or fewer of them.
To select the channels shown in the screen, use this field: Track (for MIDI tracks), Audio Track, Program,
Return, Submix, or Output Pairs (for master outputs).
To view each setting in all 16 fields, press the corresponding button (F1–F6) under the screen. You can press F4/Send
or F5/Insert multiple times to cycle through the four available slots for each.
To show the names or numbers of the channels instead of their settings, press and hold Shift. The track name,
program name, return number, submix number, or master output numbers will appear in place of the corresponding
settings. Release Shift to return to the normal view.
The following controls and tabs are available as indicated:
Level
When the Level tab is selected, the 16 fields show the velocity level (0–127) of MIDI tracks or the volume
levels in dB of the audio tracks, programs (except for MIDI and CV programs), returns, submixes, or master
outputs.
To adjust a level setting, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
Pan
When the Pan tab is selected, the 16 fields show the panning of the MIDI or audio tracks, programs (except
for MIDI and CV programs), returns, submixes, or master outputs. 50 L (left) to 50 R (right). C indicates the
center position.
To adjust a panning setting, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob. If you
use the numeric keypad to change this number, use values from 0 to 100: 0 corresponds to 50 L, 50
corresponds to C, and 100 corresponds to 50 R.
Mute
When the Mute tab is selected, the 16 fields show the mute status of the MIDI or audio tracks, programs
(except for MIDI and CV programs), returns, submixes, or master outputs.
To mute or unmute a channel, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
Send (audio tracks, programs, and submixes only)
When the Send tab is selected, the 16 fields show one of the four send levels of the audio tracks, programs
(except for MIDI and CV programs), or submixes: 0–100. You can select up to four send effects for each one.
You can use various effects in the MPC software as well as other VST and AU plugins installed on your computer.
Important: To use a send effect, you have to load an effect into the corresponding send effect slot in the
Channel Mixer. Please see General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about send effects.
To adjust a send level, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
To cycle through the four send effect levels, press F4/Send.
163
Insert (audio tracks, programs, returns, submixes, and master outputs only)
When the Insert tab is selected, the 16 fields show one of the four insert effects of the audio tracks,
programs (except for MIDI and CV programs), returns, submixes, and master outputs. You can select up to
four insert effects for each one. You can use various effects in the MPC software as well as other VST and
AU plugins installed on your computer.
To select an insert effect, use its corresponding field.
To cycle through the four insert effect slots, press F4/Send.
To load an effect, use its corresponding field. Select an effect in the Select Effect screen that appears.
Press F4/Select to load the selected effect or F3/Back to return to the previous screen.
To change the settings of a loaded effect, select its Insert field, and press Window. In the screen that
appears, you can select and change each parameter (you can use the numeric keypad on some of them).
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
To activate or deactivate an effect, turn its corresponding Q-Link knob. Alternatively, select its Insert
field, and press Window. In the screen that appears, press F6/On/Off to activate or deactivate the effect.
Press F4/Close to return to the previous screen.
Please see General Features > Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about insert effects.
Route (audio tracks, programs, returns, and submixes only)
When the Route tab is selected, the 16 fields show the output of the audio tracks, programs (except for MIDI
and CV programs), returns, and submixes: Submix (Sub) 1–8 (for audio tracks and programs), Out 1,2–31,32,
or Out 1–32.
Note: When set to a mono channel, the left and right channels are summed post-pan knob. If the pan knob
is set to the center position, the left and right channels will be summed and padded. If the pan knob is set to
the maximum left or right positions, only the respective channel will be sent to the output.
To select the output for a channel, use its corresponding field or turn its corresponding Q-Link knob.
164
MIDI Tracks
The MIDI Track Mixer shows levels, panning, and mute states for all used tracks.
To view a specific setting on all tracks, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, or F3/Mute.
165
Audio Tracks
The Audio Track Mixer shows levels, mute states, send and insert effects, and routing for all used tracks.
To view a specific setting on all tracks, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, F3/Mute, F4/Send, F5/Insert, or F6/Route. Press
F4/Send or F5/Insert to cycle through the four send effect levels or insert effect slots (respectively).
166
Programs
The Pad Mixer shows levels, panning, mute states, send and insert effects, and routing for all programs except for
MIDI programs and CV programs.
To view a specific setting on all programs, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, F3/Mute, F4/Send, F5/Insert, or F6/Route.
Press F4/Send or F5/Insert to cycle through the four send effect levels or insert effect slots (respectively).
167
Returns
Pads, programs, and audio tracks can each be sent to up to four send channels. Their audio signals will be routed to
the send channels at their designated send levels. After being processed by the effects on those channels, their signals
are then sent to the assigned master output based on their return settings (levels, panning, etc.). This view displays the
four return channels. The return mixer shows levels, panning, mute states, insert effects, and routing for all used tracks.
To view a specific setting on all returns, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, F3/Mute, F5/Insert, or F6/Route. Press F5/Insert
to cycle through the four insert effect slots.
168
Submixes
The Submixer shows levels, panning, mute states, send and insert effects, and routing for the eight available submixes.
To view a specific setting on all submixes, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, F3/Mute, F4/Send, F5/Insert, or F6/Route.
Press F4/Send or F5/Insert to cycle through the four send effect levels or insert effect slots (respectively).
169
Master Outputs
The Master Mixer shows levels, panning, mute states, and insert effects for all stereo pairs of outputs: Out 1,2–31,32.
To view a specific setting on all master outputs, press F1/Level, F2/Pan, F3/Mute, F5/Insert, or F6/Route. Press
F5/Insert to cycle through the four insert effect slots.
170
Pad Mute Mode
Pad Mute Mode lets you easily mute pads on a single track with a drum program or clip program—by simply
pressing them on your MPC hardware. This function is similar to muting pads in the Pad Mixer but more convenient.
You can also set groups for each pad, enabling you to mute multiple pads at once. This is useful if you want to hear
a track without a particular sound or if you want to isolate specific sounds or combinations of sounds.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, press Shift+Track Mute/Pad Mute.
Use the cursors to select each field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the
parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to
confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
PadMute
Press this button to view the PadMute tab.
F2
PadGroup
Press this button to view the PadGroup tab.
F4
Time Div
Press this button to open the Timing Correct screen.
F5
T.C.
This button indicates whether or not Timing Correct is on. Pressing it does not perform
any function.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
Program is the program whose pads you are viewing. Only one type of program will be available in this field at a
time (e.g., if your currently selected track uses a drum program, Program can be set to a drum program only).
Remember that only drum programs, keygroup programs, or clip programs will display properly in Pad Mute Mode.
To select a program, use this field.
The pads are shown in a 4x4 array with the names of their assigned samples. Unused pads do not show any sample
names and cannot be muted.
To mute a pad, press it on your MPC hardware. Muted pads are blue in the screen and red on your MPC
hardware. Unmuted pads are white in the screen and yellow on your MPC hardware.
Important: Unused pads do not show any sample names and cannot be muted.
To view more pads, use the Pad Bank buttons.
171
The pad group feature extends the concept of pad mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple pads (on a single track)
by pressing one pad that you have assigned to a pad group. You can create up to 16 different pad groups.
To select a pad to add to a group, press it on your MPC hardware. The selected pad is white in the screen and
green on your MPC hardware. If there are other pads in the same group, they will flash yellow on your MPC
hardware.
To assign the selected pad to a group, use the data dial or –/+ buttons. Alternatively, turn the Q-Link knobs
to assign their corresponding pads to groups.
Time Div opens the Timing Correct screen, which lets you quantize pad mutes, synchronizing them with a specific
time division: Off, 1/16th, 1/8th, 1/4, 1 bar, or 2 bar (a (3) indicates a triplet-based value). For example, with Note
Value set to 1 Bar, your mutes will always occur at the beginning of the measure immediately after you press the pad.
Note: The Timing Correct screen in other modes perform a similar function but show additional settings. See General
Features > Timing Correct/T.C. to learn about this.
To open the Timing Correct settings, press F4/Time Div.
To set the quantization of the pad mutes, use the Note Value field.
To return to the previous screen, press F4/Close. The F4/T.C. button will be lit when Timing Correct is on or
unlit when Timing Correct is off.
172
Track Mute Mode
Track Mute Mode lets you easily mute tracks within a sequence—by simply pressing them on your MPC hardware.
This function is similar to muting tracks in the Channel Mixer but more convenient. You can also set groups for each
track, enabling you to mute multiple tracks at once. This is useful if you want to hear a sequence without a particular
track (e.g., muting your keyboard track to focus on the bass) or if you want to isolate specific sounds or combinations
of sounds that are separated by track.
To enter Track Mute Mode, press Track Mute.
Use the cursors to select each field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the
parameter. If the field is a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to
confirm it.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
TrkMute
Press this button to view the PadMute tab.
F2
TrkGroup
Press this button to view the PadGroup tab.
F4
Time Div
Press this button to open the Timing Correct screen.
F5
T.C.
This button indicates whether or not Timing Correct is on. Pressing it does not perform
any function.
F6
Solo
Press and hold this button, and then press one or more pads to solo them rather than
mute them.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
Seq is the sequence whose tracks you are viewing.
To select a program, use this field.
The tracks are represented by the 16 pads in a 4x4 array with their names. Unused tracks show (unused) and cannot
be muted.
To mute a track, press its corresponding pad on your MPC hardware. Pads with muted tracks are blue in the
screen and red on your MPC hardware. Pads with unmuted tracks are white in the screen and yellow on your
MPC hardware.
To view more tracks, use the Pad Bank buttons.
173
The track group feature extends the concept of track mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple tracks (in a single
sequence) by pressing one pad whose track you have assigned to that track group. You can create up to 16 different
track groups.
To select a track to add to a group, press the corresponding pad on your MPC hardware. The selected pad is
white in the screen and green on your MPC hardware. If there are other tracks in the same group, their pads will
flash yellow on your MPC hardware.
To assign the selected track to a group, use the data dial or –/+ buttons. Alternatively, turn the Q-Link knobs
to assign the tracks on their corresponding pads to groups.
Time Div opens the Timing Correct screen, which lets you quantize track mutes, synchronizing them with a specific
time division: Off, 1/16th, 1/8th, 1/4, 1 bar, or 2 bar (a (3) indicates a triplet-based value). For example, with Note
Value set to 1 Bar, your mutes will always occur at the beginning of the measure immediately after you press the pad.
Note: The Timing Correct screen in other modes perform a similar function but show additional settings. See General
Features > Timing Correct/T.C. to learn about this.
To open the Timing Correct settings, press F4/Time Div.
To set the quantization of the track mutes, use the Note Value field.
To return to the previous screen, press F4/Close. The F4/T.C. button will be lit when Timing Correct is on or
unlit when Timing Correct is off.
Solo lets you solo pads rather than mute them.
To solo one or more pads, press and hold F6/Solo, and then press one or more pads to solo or un-solo them.
174
Next Sequence Mode
Next Sequence Mode lets you trigger different sequences simply by playing the pads. This is useful during live
performances when you may want to change a song’s structure in real time.
To enter Next Sequence Mode, press Next Seq.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
To Song
Press this button to open the Copy to Song screen.
F3
Next Bar
Press this button to switch to the selected sequence at the beginning of the next bar.
F4
Sudden
Press this button to switch to the selected sequence immediately.
F5
Hold
Press this button to repeat the currently paying sequence indefinitely and temporarily
ignore other pad presses.
F6
Clear
Press this button to delete the currently selected sequence from the sequence playlist.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
Seq is the sequence that is currently playing.
To select a sequence, press its corresponding pad.
The sequences are represented by the 16 pads in a 4x4 array with their names. Unused sequences show (unused)
but can still be selected and played.
To select a sequence, press its corresponding pad on your MPC hardware. The pad for the currently playing
sequence is white in the screen and green on your MPC hardware.
To view more sequences, use the Pad Bank buttons.
During playback, change the next sequence that will play by pressing the corresponding pad. If you do not select
another sequence, the current sequence will repeat indefinitely. As a sequence plays, you can use the F3–F6 buttons
under the screen to change how playback works.
To start playback, press Play or Play Start.
To stop playback, press Stop.
The Next Bar function causes the next sequence to play only after the current bar is done playing. This is useful for
switching to another sequence before the current one ends without worrying about timing issues.
To activate the Next Bar function, press and hold F3/Next Bar. Release the button to deactivate it.
175
The Sudden function causes the new sequence to start playing whether or not the current sequence is done. This is
useful in live performances for switching to the next sequence instantly at a certain cue.
To activate the Sudden function, press and hold F4/Sudden. Release the button to deactivate it.
The Hold function causes the currently playing sequence to repeat indefinitely and temporarily ignore other pad
presses. This is useful if you want to select other pads without selecting them to play next.
To activate the Hold function, press F5/Hold. Press it again to deactivate it.
All of the sequences that have played are stored in a playlist in the MPC software (with their number of repetitions
and tempos as well as the precise order in which they were played). You can send this playlist to Song Mode in order
to export it to a finished song, or you can clear it and start a new performance.
To cancel the sequence that will play next, press F6/Clear. This will delete the next sequence from the
sequence playlist. The current sequence will continue playing or you can click or press a pad to select another
sequence to play next. This option is available only if that sequence is not playing at that moment.
To copy the sequence playlist to a song, press F1/To Song while playback is stopped. In the Copy to Song
screen that appears, use the Copy to Song field to select a song, and then press F5/Do It to continue or
F4/Cancel to return to the previous screen. Please see Song Mode to learn more about exporting a song.
176
Song Mode
Song Mode lets you arrange sequences in a specific order with specified repetitions to create complete songs. You
can edit the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly composing.
A project can contain up to 32 songs, each consisting of up to 999 “steps.” Each step can have an assigned sequence
as well as the number of times that sequence will repeat.
To open Song Mode, press Song.
Important: If a sequence is currently playing, stop playback before entering Song Mode. You cannot enter Song
Mode during playback.
Important: When creating a song, the program used by each track in the song’s first sequence will be used by all
subsequent tracks. In other words, all identically numbered tracks (across sequences) will use the program used by
the first sequence in the song—regardless of what programs each track uses while not in Song Mode.
For example, if you create a project in this way…:
• Track 1 of Sequence 1 uses a drum program.
• Track 1 of Sequence 2 uses a keygroup program.
• A song uses Sequence 1 as its first sequence and then uses Sequence 2 any time after it.
…then, in that song, Track 1 in Sequence 2 will use the same drum program as Track 1, Sequence 1.
Because of this, we recommend trying to be consistent while creating tracks in sequences that you intend to use in a
single song. Remember that you can copy one track to another if you ever need to reorder the tracks of a sequence
(see General Features > Edit Sequence to learn about this).
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Clear
Press this button to clear all steps and sequences from the list immediately.
F2
Sudden
During playback, press this button to switch to the next sequence at the beginning of
the next bar.
F3
Next
During playback, press this button to switch to the next sequence immediately.
F4
Convert
Press this button to open the Convert Song screen.
F5
Delete
Press this button to delete the currently selected sequence from the sequence playlist.
F6
Insert
Press this button to insert a step in the sequence playlist immediately after the currently
selected step.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
The BPM next to seq/mst at the top of the screen is the current tempo.
When set to seq, the number is the tempo of the currently selected sequence.
When set to mst, the number is the master tempo.
To set the tempo, use the BPM field or press Tap Tempo in time with the desired tempo.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (seq) or a master tempo (mst), use the seq/mst selector
or press Shift+Tap Tempo.
Song is the current song number and its name.
To select a sequence, use this field.
Bars is the length of the sequence in bars.
To set the number of bars, use this field.
177
The sequence playlist lists of the “steps” of a song:
Step is the step number (each song can contain up to 999 steps)
To insert a step, press F6/Insert.
To delete a step, press F5/Delete.
Sequence is the number and name of the sequence used in that step.
To change the sequence of the selected step, use this field.
Rpts is the number of times the sequence plays. Each step can play up to 999 times. To set the sequence to
repeat indefinitely until you stop playback, set it to Hold (the lowest/minimum value).
To change the number of repetitions, use this field.
BPM is the tempo of the sequence.
Bars is the number of bars in the sequence (ignoring the number of repetitions).
Clear immediately erases all steps and sequences from the list.
To clear the song, press F1/Clear.
Convert opens the Convert Song screen where you can export the song as a sequence within your project.
To convert your song into a sequence, press F4/Convert. Use the fields in the Convert Song screen that appears:
•
Sequence is the sequence to which your song will be exported.
•
Muted Tracks determines if the exported song will include any tracks that are currently muted (INCLUDE
MUTED TRACKS) or exclude them (IGNORE MUTED TRACKS).
•
F4/Cancel returns to the previous screen without exporting the song.
•
F5/Do It exports the song to the sequence and returns to the previous screen.
Delete immediately erases the currently selected sequence from the sequence playlist.
To delete a step, press F5/Delete.
Insert creates a step in the sequence playlist immediately after the currently selected step.
To insert a step, press F6/Insert.
Alternatively, “record” a song using the pads:
Note: The sequences or song will not play back as you use the pads to create your song in this way. Pressing the
pads just enters their corresponding sequences as steps.
1. Press Rec or Overdub to “record-arm” the song.
2. Press the pad that corresponds to the first sequence you want to use. That sequence will appear in the sequence
playlist as the first step.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each additional step you want to add to the sequence playlist. Press a pad multiple times to
add to the number of times it plays.
4. Press Stop to stop “recording.”
To render/export your song as an audio file, use the Audio Mixdown screen in the software window. To see the
user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select MPC
User Manual.
178
Q-Link Edit Mode
Q-Link Edit Mode lets you determine what the Q-Link knobs control in other modes. This is helpful when you want to
use the Q-Link knobs to control parameters that might not be shown in the current mode—or parameters that are
shown across different modes.
To enter Q-Link Edit Mode, press Shift+Prog Edit/Q-Link.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Project
Press this button to select the Project Q-Link Edit mode. See the following Project
section to learn about this.
F2
Program
Press this button to select the Program Q-Link Edit mode. See the following
Program section to learn about this.
F3
Pad Scene
Press this button to select the Pad Scene Q-Link Edit mode. See the following
Pad Scene section to learn about this.
F4
Pad Param
Press this button to select the Pad Parameter Q-Link Edit mode. See the following
Pad Parameter section to learn about this.
F5
Screen
Press this button to select the Screen Q-Link Edit mode. See the following Screen
section to learn about this.
F6
Parameter/Value
Press this button to switch between viewing the parameter names (Parameter)
and values (Value) in the screen.
While in Q-Link Edit Mode:
To adjust the settings shown on-screen, turn the corresponding Q-Link knobs.
To select an edit mode for the Q-Link knobs, press the corresponding button (F1–F5) under the screen. See
below for more information.
To switch between viewing the parameter names and values in the screen, press F6/Parameter/Value.
179
To select an edit mode for the Q-Link knobs, press the corresponding button (F1–F5) under the screen:
Project: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 parameters within the current project overall. See the
following Project section to learn about this specific Q-Link Edit Mode.
Program: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 program or audio track parameters. See the
following Program section to learn about this specific Q-Link Edit Mode.
Pad Scene (for drum programs only): In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 parameters for the
currently selected pad. See the following Pad Scene section to learn about this specific Q-Link Edit Mode.
Pad Parameter: In this edit mode, the 16 Q-Link knobs correspond to the 16 pads, each one controlling the
same parameter for each pad. This is useful if you need to adjust the same parameter on multiple pads at once
rather than having to select and edit each pad individually. See the following Pad Parameter section to learn
about this specific Q-Link Edit Mode.
Screen: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs will control a parameter or group of parameters in your currently
selected mode (e.g., Main Mode, Sample Edit Mode, etc.).
Project
In the Project Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control 16 parameters within the current project.
You can customize the parameters shown in this mode by using the Q-Link Setup section in MPC software window.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
Program
In the Program Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control 16 parameters within the currently selected program or
audio track.
You can customize the parameters shown in this mode by using the Q-Link Setup section in MPC software window.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
180
Pad Scene
In the Pad Scene Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control your favorite 16 parameters for the currently selected
pad. You can select another pad simply by pressing it, allowing you to adjust the same 16 parameters for that new pad.
(These assignments are automatically saved with other user settings. Any project you load will use these assignments.)
To select a pad, press it.
You can customize the parameters shown in this mode by using the Q-Link Setup section in MPC software window.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
Pad Parameter
In the Pad Parameter Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control the same pad parameter for the each of the 16
pads in the current pad bank.
For example, if the Parameter is set to Level, the 16 Q-Link knobs will adjust the 16 independent Level settings for
each pad in the current pad bank. You could then set the Parameter to Pan and use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the
panning of all 16 pads.
Tip: Pressing F6/Parameter/Value to switch between viewing the parameter names (Parameter) and values (Value)
in the screen is the most useful in this mode.
You can customize the parameters shown in this mode by using the Q-Link Setup section in MPC software window.
To see the user guide in the MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
181
Screen
In the Screen Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs will control only the parameter or group of parameters in your
currently selected mode (e.g., Main Mode, Sample Edit Mode, etc.).
182
MIDI Control Mode
You can use MIDI Control Mode on your MPC hardware to customize what MIDI messages each control sends. This
custom “control map” will then work whenever you are in MIDI Control Mode. The edits you make in MIDI Control
Mode will be retained with the current MPC project.
This is helpful when using MPC as a plugin: you can use MIDI Control Mode to use your MPC hardware to control
your host software, and then switch back to any other mode to control the MPC plugin.
To enter MIDI Control Mode, press Shift+Song/Other.
Important: In your host software, make sure your MPC hardware is selected as a MIDI controller device.
Use the fields to set each control’s parameters to your preference. The available parameters depend on its type: a
pad, or button, or a Q-Link knob. When you have set all of the parameters as desired, you can select another
control or enter another mode.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Prefs
Press this button to show the Preferences screen. See General Features > Preferences
to learn more.
To select a pad or button to edit, use the Control field, or press it on your MPC hardware.
To select a Q-Link knob to edit, use the Control field, or touch or turn it on your MPC hardware.
Note: The Control field may show many more hardware controls than are actually available on your MPC hardware.
This is because the list includes all possible controls from all current MPC models (MPC Renaissance, MPC Studio,
MPC Touch, etc.). You can edit only the controls that are described in this chapter.
Note: The MPC software window will also display a graphical interface resembling your MPC hardware. Editable
controls show their current MIDI message. Pads and Q-Link knobs show their current MIDI channels.
183
Pads
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each pad:
Control is the hardware control you are currently editing (Pad 1–Pad 16).
Set All determines whether or not these settings will be applied across all pad banks.
•
On: The pad’s messages and parameters will be identical across all eight banks.
•
Off: The pad’s messages and parameters will apply to the current pad only.
Light LED determines how the pad’s LEDs will behave.
•
Never: The LEDs will always be off.
•
MIDI Input: The LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the pad.
•
Local: The LEDs will light up when you press the pad and/or MIDI input is received.
Midi Channel determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the pad will use to send its message to the software.
Note is the MIDI note number the pad will send to the software when you press it (0–127 or C-2 to G8).
Velocity determines whether the pad will be velocity-sensitive (On) or not (Off). When set to Off, pressing the
pad will send a note at full-level (127) always.
Aftertouch determines how the pad’s aftertouch (pressure applied to the pad after the initial press) behaves.
•
Off: The pad will not send any aftertouch messages.
•
Channel: If you press multiple pads that have this setting, the aftertouch messages they send will be
identical.
•
Poly: If you press multiple pads, the aftertouch message each pad sends will be independent from the others.
184
Buttons
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each button.
Control is the hardware control you are currently editing (the button name).
Light LED determines how the button’s LED (or multiple LEDs) will behave.
•
Never: The LEDs will always be off.
•
MIDI Input: The LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the button.
•
Local: The LEDs will light up when you press the button and/or MIDI input is received.
Midi Channel determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the button will use to send its message to the software.
CC Number determines what MIDI control change number the button will send to the software.
Type determines whether the button will behave as a temporary switch (Momentary) or latching switch (Toggle).
Set All determines whether or not these settings will be applied across all buttons.
•
On: The button’s messages and parameters will be identical across all buttons.
•
Off: The button’s messages and parameters will apply to the current button only.
185
Q-Link Knobs
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each Q-Link knob:
Control is the hardware control you are currently editing (Q-Link 1–16).
Light LED determines how the Q-Link knobs LEDs will behave on an MPC Renaissance. This does not have a
function on MPC Studio (whose Q-Link knobs do not have LEDs).
•
Never: The LEDs will always be off.
•
MIDI Input: The LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the Q-Link knob.
•
Local: The LEDs will light up when you touch or turn the Q-Link knob and/or MIDI input is received.
Midi Channel determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the Q-Link knob will use to send its message to the software.
CC Number determines what MIDI control change number the Q-Link knob will send to the software.
Mode determines how the Q-Link knob will control its parameter:
•
Absolute: The Q-Link knob’s current position determines its parameter’s value; moving it may cause its
parameter to “snap” to a new position if you’re using it to control different parameters in different modes.
•
Relative: Moving the Q-Link knob will increase or decrease its parameter regardless of its physical position.
Set All determines whether or not these settings will be applied across all Q-Link knobs.
•
On: The Q-Link knob’s messages and parameters will be identical across all Q-Link knobs.
•
Off: The Q-Link knob’s messages and parameters will apply to the current Q-Link knob only.
Low Range is the Q-Link knob’s lowest possible value (0–127).
High Range is the Q-Link knob’s highest possible value (0–127).
Touch Sense activates or deactivates the Q-Link knob’s touch-capacitive circuitry.
•
On: You can touch the Q-Link knob to send a Note On message to the software (this is how your MPC
hardware normally works).
•
Off: The Q-Link knob will not send any Note On messages; it will only send CC messages when you turn it.
Touch Note is the MIDI note number the Q-Link knob will send to the software when you touch it (0–127 or C-2
to G8). Touch Sense must be set to On for this to work.
186
Pad Perform Mode
Pad Perform Mode lets you assign musical scales/modes, chords, or progressions to the pads for more creative
performance.
To enter Pad Perform Mode, press Pad Assign while using a keygroup program, MIDI program, plugin program, or
CV program. (Although you can enter Pad Perform Mode while using a drum program or clip program, it does not
work with these programs.)
The screen will show the current pad bank’s mapping of notes or chords. The pads are shown in a 4x4 array with the
names of their assigned note or chord.
To play a note or chord, press it on your MPC hardware.
To shift the octave range of the pads down or up, press F5/Octave– or F6/Octave+ (respectively).
To transpose the pads down or up, press Shift+F5/Note– or Shift+F6/Note+ (respectively).
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
Notes
Press this button to set Type to Notes.
F2
1-3-5
Press this button to set Type to Chords and set Chord to 1-3-5 (major/minor).
F3
1-3-5-7
Press this button to set Type to Chords and set Chord to 1-3-5-7 (major7/minor7).
F4
Progrsn
Press this button to set Type to Progressions.
F5
Octave–
Press this button to shift the pad assignments down an octave.
F6
Octave+
Press this button to shift the pad assignments up an octave.
Shift+F2
1-4-5
Press these buttons to set Type to Chords and set Chord to 1-4-5 (sus4).
Shift+F3
1-3-5-7b
Press these buttons to set Type to Chords and set Chord to 1-3-5-7b (dominant).
Shift+F5
Note–
Press these buttons to shift the pad assignments down a semitone, essentially lowering
the Root Note field by a half-step.
Shift+F6
Note+
Press these buttons to shift the pad assignments up a semitone, essentially raising the
Root Note field by a half-step.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
187
Type determines what will be mapped over the pads:
•
Chromatic: Each pad is assigned a note, ascending by one semitone with each pad. Pads with notes in the
key determined by the Scale will be lit, while pads with notes between the scale degrees will be unlit.
•
Notes: Each pad is assigned a note, ascending by one scale degree with each pad.
•
Chords: Each pad is assigned a chord, the root note ascending by one scale degree with each pad. All
available chords will play in the key determined by the Scale field.
•
Chromatic Chords: Each pad is assigned a chord, the root note ascending by one scale degree with each
pad. You can play any chord type regardless of the key determined by the Scale field. Essentially, this is like
the Chords setting but with more options to play chords out of the set key.
•
Progressions: Each pad is assigned a chord in a chord progression. You can play the pads in (or out of)
order to construct songs quickly. The available chords are determined by the Chord field.
188
Scale determines the root note and the scale type.
Root Note (pitch and register): This is the starting point of the scale. The available notes are all chromatic notes
across the range of the pads. The pad that’s assigned the root note will be lit differently (and highlighted on the
screen) to indicate where the scale starts in each octave.
Scale Type: This is the scale or mode based on the root note (this is disabled when Type is set to Progressions).
The available scales are:
Major
Gypsy
Dorian
Natural Minor
Hungarian Gypsy
Phrygian
Harmonic Minor
Persian
Lydian
Pentatonic Major
Major Bebop
Mixolydian
Pentatonic Minor
Whole Tone
Aeolian
Blues (minor)
Chromatic
Locrian
Flamenco
Chord determines what chord type will play when pressing a pad. The chord will use those scale degrees based off
of the pad’s root note. You can use this only when Type is set to Chords or Chromatic Chords.
When set to Chords, the available chords are:
1-3-5 (major/minor)
1-3-5-7 (major7/minor7)
1-4-5 (sus4)
1-3-5-7b (dominant)
1-2-5 (sus2)
When set to Chromatic Chords, the available chords are:
Major
Major7
Augmented
Minor
Minor7
Diminished
Sus2
Major9
Sus4
Minor9
Banks determines how the notes are mapped across the pad banks:
•
Continuous: Pad 1 of one bank is always one scale degree higher than Pad 16 of the previous bank.
•
Start on Root: Pad 1 will always be the root note of the scale in every pad bank.
189
Appendix
Effects & Parameters
This chapter lists the available effects. To learn more about how effects work with MPC, please see General Features
> Effects.
Note: Some of these effects have a “sync” version (e.g., Flanger Sync, Autopan Sync, etc.) whose rates will be
affected by the current tempo. While viewing the rate of these effects, a “.” next to the time division indicates a
triplet-based rate.
Reverbs
Options: Reverb Small, Reverb Medium, Reverb Large, Reverb Large 2, Reverb In Gate, Reverb Out Gate
Reverb Small
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a small room.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
50
Lo-Cut
0–100
15
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
50
Lo-Cut
0–100
15
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Reverb Medium
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a medium room.
190
Reverb Large
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate the sound of a
large hall.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Gate In
0–100
0
Reverb Large 2
This is a less CPU-intensive spatial effect, emulating the
sound of a large hall.
Reverb In Gate
This is a hall reverb with an additional control. The reverb
effect is cut off when the input drops below the level set in
the Gate In parameter.
191
Reverb Out Gate
This is a hall reverb that has an additional control. The reverb Parameter
effect is cut off when the output drops below the level set in
Dry/Wet
the Gate Out parameter.
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Gate Out
0–100
0
Delays
Delays the original signal for a specified period of time and plays it back over an adjustable period of time.
Options: Delay Mono, Delay Mono Sync, Delay Stereo, Delay Sync (Stereo), Delay LP, Delay HP, Delay Analog,
Delay Analog Sync, Delay Tape Sync, Delay Ping Pong, Delay Multi-Tap
Delay Mono
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Delay Mono Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
192
Delay Stereo
Stereo Delay operates similarly to Mono Delay but in true
stereo.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
500
Feedback
0–100
50
Cutoff
0–100
50
Resonance
0–100
20
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
50
Cutoff
0–100
33
Resonance
0–100
33
Delay Sync (Stereo)
Stereo Delay operates similarly to Mono Delay but in true
stereo.
Delay LP
LP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant low-pass filter in the delay line.
Delay HP
HP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant high-pass filter in the delay line.
193
Delay Analog
Analog Delay is similar to the Mono Delay, except that it’s
Parameter
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
Dry/Wet
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Time
Feedback
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
2–2000 ms
100
0–100
25
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Delay Analog Sync
Analog Delay is similar to Mono Delay, except that it’s
Parameter
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
Dry/Wet
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Ramp
0–100
50
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Delay Tape Sync
Tape Delay emulates a delay system using an analog tape
Parameter
loop and a series of tape heads to produce an echo effect.
This delay type yields a very distinct echo sound often heard Dry/Wet
in reggae and dub-style music.
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Ramp
0–100
50
Head 1
0–100
100
Head 2
0–100
0
Head 3
0–100
0
Head 4
0–100
0
Tone
0–100
50
Spread
0–100
50
Wow & Flutter
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time, Left
2–2000 ms
100
Time, Right
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Delay Ping Pong
This stereo delay allows you to set different delay times for
its left and right repeats.
194
Delay Multi-Tap
This delay is a mono delay which has three delay generators
with independently adjustable delay times and stereo
position.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time 1
2–2000 ms
100
Time 2
2–2000 ms
100
Time 3
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Pan 1
0–100
50
Pan 2
0–100
50
Pan 3
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
Gain 1
0–100
25
Gain 2
0–100
25
Gain 3
0–100
25
Flangers
A flanger is a modulated delay to emulate the sound created when running two analog tape machines in parallel with
a slight time misalignment. Slow Rate settings can produce a “whooshing” jet engine sound, while faster rates result
in more of a “warble.”
Options: Flanger, Flanger Sync
Flanger
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Feedback
-100 – 100
0
Delay
0–100
20
Width
0–100
80
Flanger Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
8 bars – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Feedback
-100 – 100
0
Delay
0–100
20
Width
0–100
80
195
Choruses
A chorus effect uses an LFO to modulate the pitch and a delay of the input signal, which are then added to the dry
signal. In small amounts, this creates the illusion of multiple voices playing at once. Turn up the Feedback and
Depth for more pronounced “shimmering” and “watery” sounds.
Options: Chorus 2-Voice, Chorus 4-Voice
Chorus 2-Voice
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Delay
0–100
20
Amount
0–100
80
Width
0–100
80
Feedback
0–100
50
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Delay
0–100
20
Amount
0–100
80
Width
0–100
80
Feedback
0–100
50
Rate
0–100
10
Chorus 4-Voice
Autopans
This effect uses an LFO to move the incoming signal back and forth across the stereo field, creating a rotary effect.
Options: Autopan, Autopan Sync
Autopan
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Autopan Sync
196
Tremolos
This effect uses an LFO to increase and decrease the volume of the signal. Depending on the LFO shape, this can
produce a smooth wave effect (sine wave) or a stuttering “on-off” effect (square wave).
Options: Tremolo, Tremolo Sync
Tremolo
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
Tremolo Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
1 bar – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
Phasers
The classic phaser effect created by multiple ganged all-pass filters to create “notches,” or sharp spikes, in the frequency
spectrum. The frequencies of these all-pass filters are usually modulated by an LFO to create a sweeping sound.
Options: Phaser 1, Phaser 2, Phaser Sync
Phaser 1
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
1 bar – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Phaser 2
Phaser Sync
197
HP (High-Pass) Filters
Options: HP Filter, HP Filter Sweep, HP Filter Sync, HP Shelving Filter
HP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Frequency
10–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
HP Filter Sweep
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
HP Filter Sync
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
80
Low Frequency 0–100
50
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
33
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
50
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Value Range
Default Value
10–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
HP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates Parameter
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Frequency
198
LP (Low-Pass) Filters
Options: LP Filter, LP Filter Sweep, LP Filter Sync, LP Shelving Filter
LP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
LP Filter Sweep
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
LP Filter Sync
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Frequency
10–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
80
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
33
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
50
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Value Range
Default Value
10–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
LP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates Parameter
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Frequency
199
Parametric EQs
Options: PEQ 2-Band, 2-Shelf, PEQ 4-Band
PEQ 2-Band, 2-Shelf
This effect is a combination of one two-band parametric
equalizer and two shelving filters.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Low Frequency
22–1000 Hz
220
Frequency 1
82–3900 Hz
820
Frequency 2
220–10000 Hz
2200
High Frequency
560–19999 Hz
5600
Q1
0–100
0
Q2
0–100
0
Low Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 1
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 2
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
High Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
PEQ 4-Band
This effect is a powerful four-band parametric equalizer with
four independent EQ ranges.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Low Frequency
22–1000 Hz
220
Frequency 1
82–3900 Hz
820
Frequency 2
220–10000 Hz
2200
High Frequency
560–19999 Hz
5600
Q1
0–100
5
Q2
0–100
5
Q3
0–100
5
Q4
0–100
5
Gain 1
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 2
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 3
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 4
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
200
Distortions
Options: Distortion Amp, Distortion Fuzz, Distortion Grimey, Distortion Overdrive, Distortion Custom
Distortion Amp
This effect is designed to reproduce the sound of a tube
amplifier at high volumes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Tone
0–100
50
Dynamics
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Low
0–100
50
Low-Mid
0–100
50
High-Mid
0–100
50
High
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Grime
0–100
50
Center
0–100
50
Width
0–100
50
Resonance
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Tone
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Distortion Fuzz
This popular effect uses hard clipping of the audio signal,
which, at extreme settings, can turn a standard waveform
into a square wave, producing a “razor” effect.
Distortion Grimey
This is a unique distortion effect that distorts a frequency
range in a selectable band.
Distortion Overdrive
This distortion is designed to sound like a mildly distorting
amplifier at medium volumes. It is the smoothest distortion
type available.
201
Distortion Custom
This effect is a highly customized distortion, capable of a
wide range of useable sounds.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
+Soft
5–75
2
+Clip
5–50
25
–Soft
5–75
2
–Clip
5–50
25
Low
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Mid
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
High
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Output
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
50
Compressors
A compressor is an effect that changes the dynamic range of a signal by automatically reducing its gain.
Options: Compressor Master, Compressor Opto, Compressor VCA, Compressor Vintage
Compressor Master
This is the most transparent compressor, able to perform
substantial volume adjustments without artifacts.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Oldskool
Off, On
Off
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
-6 – 18 dB
0
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Compressor Opto
The Opto Compressor is modeled after a vintage
Parameter
compressor type using an optical circuit to control the
volume reduction of the input signal. These compressors are Dry/Wet
usually associated with soft and unobtrusive attack and
Input
release characteristics.
Attack
202
Compressor VCA
This compressor is more modern-sounding, with a slightly
more transparent sound. A VCA Compressor tends to have
quicker attack and release times than an Opto Compressor.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Input
-6 – 18 dB
0
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Input
-6 – 18 dB
0
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Decimate
0–100
0
Bit Reducer
4–32
32
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
0
Decimate
0–100
0
Compressor Vintage
This compressor has a sound similar to classic tube
compressors, with their gentle yet pumping response and a
dash of tube saturation.
Bit Reducers
Options: Decimator, Resampler
Decimator
Decimator down-samples the incoming signal by removing
bits from the digital signal. The difference between
decimation and resampling is that Decimator does not use
any filtering to mask or correct digital artifacts. The result is
an effect ranging from mild to almost completely pure digital
distortion, depending on the setting and the source material.
Resampler
Resampler is similar to Decimator in that it removes bits from
an incoming signal. The difference is that Resampler applies
a complex suite of filters and anti-aliasing to attempt to
retain the original sound quality. This is a method used by
popular vintage samplers and sampling drum machines from
the 1980s. Resampler can be used to achieve a “dirty”
sound on drum loops, without the harshness of distortion.
203
Other
Options: Auto Wah, Frequency Shifter, Transient Shaper
Auto Wah
This effect is a low-pass filter modulated by an envelope that Parameter
yields a classic funky “wah-wah”- like sound. The envelope
is triggered by the incoming signal’s amplitude. The amount Dry/Wet
of the envelope on the cutoff frequency is user-definable.
Resonance
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
0–100
75
Attack
0–100
30
Release
0–100
30
Center
0–100
50
Sensitivity
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Frequency
-1000 – 1000
0
Asynchrony
0–1000
0
A Pan
0–100
0
B Pan
0–100
100
A Gain
0–100
75
B Gain
0–100
75
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Frequency Shifter
A frequency shifter changes the frequencies of an input
signal by a fixed amount and alters the relationship of the
original harmonics. This can produce a chorus-like effect as
well as very crazy artificial timbres.
Transient Shaper
A transient shaper can be used to enhance or soften the
Attack and Release phases of audio material.
204
Glossary
This glossary briefly defines and explains many of the technical terms used throughout this manual.
Aftertouch
The majority of contemporary keyboards are capable of generating aftertouch messages. On this
type of keyboard, when you press harder on a key you are already holding down, a MIDI aftertouch
message is generated. This feature makes sounds even more expressive (e.g., through vibrato).
Aliasing
Aliasing is an audible side effect arising in digital systems as soon as a signal contains harmonics
higher than half the sampling frequency.
Amount
Describes to which extent a modulation source influences a given parameter.
Amplifier
An amplifier is a component that influences the volume level of a sound via a control signal. It
can be modulated by a control signal (e.g., generated by an envelope or an LFO).
Attack
An envelope parameter. This term describes the ascent rate of a time-relevant process (e.g., an
envelope from its starting point to the point where it reaches its highest value). The attack phase
is initiated immediately after a trigger signal is received (e.g., after you play a note on a trigger
pad or a keyboard).
Bit Rate
Bit rate (also known as word length), is the number of bits used to store the level information of
each single sample slice within a whole sample. The higher the bit rate, the more precise the
information about a sample (i.e., its dynamics’ resolution). Normal audio CDs are 16-bit. The
MPC hardware supports full 24-bit resolution.
Bounce
When you “bounce” a sequence, track, or program, you are rendering that part of your project as
an audio file (as opposed to a MIDI file). The MPC hardware lets you bounce sequences, tracks,
or programs as samples (saved to your project’s sample pool) or as full audio tracks (saved to
your project’s sample pool and added directly to the current sequence).
Bouncing a track will render that track after it is sent through its program. Bouncing a program
will render all tracks that use that program after they are sent through it. Bouncing a sequence
will render all tracks in that sequence after they are sent through their respective programs.
Clipping
Clipping is a sort of distortion that occurs when a signal exceeds the maximum value that can be
handled by a signal processing system it is fed into. The curve of a clipped signal is dependent
on the system where the clipping occurs. In the analog domain, clipping effectively limits the
signal to a given maximum level. In the digital domain, clipping is similar to a numerical overflow,
resulting in negative polarity of the signal’s portions exceeding the maximum level.
Control Change
MIDI messages enable you to manipulate the behavior of a sound generator to a significant
degree. This message essentially consists of two components:
(Controllers)
•
The controller number, which determines the parameter to be influenced. It can range
from 0 to 127.
•
The controller value, which determines the extent of the modification.
Controllers can be used for effects such as slowly swelling vibrato, changing the stereo panning
position and influencing filter frequency.
Cutoff
The cutoff frequency is a significant factor for a filter. A low-pass filter for example dampens the
portion of the signal that lies above this frequency. Frequencies below this value are allowed to
pass through without being processed.
205
CV
CV stands for control voltage, an analog method of sending control messages to external
synthesizers, drum machines, etc. CV messages are typically used in conjunction with Gate
messages (CV messages determine the pitch of notes while Gate messages determine note
activation and length). CV messages are sent from the CV out ports of your MPC hardware and
to the CV in ports of your external MIDI device.
Please note that each external MIDI device uses a specific control voltage range, which
determines how many volts are used in each octave (e.g., 1V/oct). Be mindful of this when
setting it up with the MPC software and/or controller hardware—mismatched voltage ranges can
produce unusual/undesirable “re-scaling” of the octaves.
Decay
Decay describes the descent rate of an envelope once the attack phase has reached its
maximum and the envelope drops to the level defined by the sustain value.
Envelope
An envelope is used to modulate a sound-shaping component within a given time. For instance,
an envelope that modulates the cutoff frequency of a filter opens and closes this filter over a
period of time. An envelope is started via a trigger, usually a MIDI note.
The classic ADSR envelope consists of four individually variable phases: attack, decay, sustain,
and release. Attack, decay and release are time or slope values, while sustain is an adjustable
level. Once an incoming trigger is received, the envelope runs through the attack and decay
phases until it reaches the programmed sustain level. This level remains constant until the trigger
is terminated. The envelope then initiates the release phase until it reaches the minimum value.
You can see and read about the envelopes used in MPC Studio in Operation > Modes >
Program Edit Mode > Anatomy of an Envelope.
Filter
A filter is a component that allows some of a signal’s frequencies to pass through it and
dampens other frequencies. The most important aspect of a filter is the filter cutoff frequency.
Filters generally come in four categories: low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, and band-stop.
These are the available filters:
A low-pass filter (the most common type) dampens all frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
A high-pass filter in turn dampens the frequencies below the cutoff.
A band-pass filter allows only those frequencies around the cutoff frequency to pass. All
others are dampened.
A band-stop filter does the opposite of a band-pass: it dampens only the frequencies around
the cutoff frequency.
A band-boost filter boosts the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, similar to what a band
on an equalizer would do. All other frequencies pass through normally.
The number of poles in a filter’s “slope” determines how extreme or subtle the effect of the
filter will be. Filters with one or two poles produce a subtler sound while filters with six or eight
poles are much more pronounced.
The Model filters are analog-style emulations of famous vintage synth filters. Model1 is a fourpole filter that distorts at high input levels. Model2 uses a mellow resonance with a “fattening”
distortion in the lower frequencies. Model3 can produce howling, piercing resonances and
extreme sub frequencies—watch your speakers!
The Vocal filters are formant filters that emulate the human voice. Vocal1 produces “ah” and
“ooh” vowel sounds. Vocal2 uses three bands to produce “oh” and “ee” vowel sounds.
Vocal3 uses five bands to emulate an idealized model of the vocal tract.
MPC3000 LPF is a dynamic, resonant low-pass filter (12 dB/oct) that was used on the original
MPC3000, released in 1994.
Please also see the entry for Resonance, an essential characteristic of a filter’s sound.
Gate
Gate messages are analog messages sent to external synthesizers, drum machines, etc. Gate
messages are typically used in conjunction with CV messages (CV messages determine the pitch
of notes while Gate messages determine note activation and length). Gate messages are sent from
the CV out ports of your MPC hardware and to the CV/Gate in ports of your external MIDI device.
206
LFO
LFO is an acronym for low-frequency oscillator. The LFO generates a periodic oscillation at
a low frequency and features variable waveshapes. Similar to an envelope, an LFO can be
used to modulate a sound-shaping component.
MIDI
MIDI stands for musical instrument digital interface. Developed in the early 1980s, MIDI
enables interaction between various types of electronic music instruments from different
manufacturers. At the time a communications standard for heterogeneous devices did not
exist, so MIDI was a significant advance. It made it possible to link various devices with one
another through simple, standardized connectors.
Essentially, this is how MIDI works: One sender is connected to one or several receivers. For
instance, if you want to use a computer to play a MIDI synthesizer, the computer is the sender
and the synthesizer acts as the receiver. With a few exceptions, the majority of MIDI devices
are equipped with two or three ports for this purpose: MIDI In, MIDI Out and in some cases
MIDI Thru. The sender transfers data to the receiver via the MIDI Out jack. Data are sent via a
cable to the receiver’s MIDI In jack.
MIDI Thru has a special function. It allows the sender to transmit to several receivers. It routes
the incoming signal to the next device without modifying it. Another device is simply
connected to this jack, thus creating a chain through which the sender can address a number
of receivers. Of course, it is desirable for the sender to be able to address each device
individually. To achieve this, a MIDI channel message is sent with each MIDI event.
MIDI Channel
This is a very important element of most messages. A receiver can only respond to incoming
messages if its receive channel is set to the same channel as the one the sender is using to
transmit data. Subsequently, the sender can address specific receivers individually. MIDI
Channels 1–16 are available for this purpose.
MIDI Clock
The MIDI clock message transmits real-time tempo information to synchronize processes
among several connected devices (e.g., a sound generator’s delay time to a MIDI sequencer).
Modulation
A modulation influences or changes a sound-shaping component via a modulation source.
Modulation sources include envelopes, LFOs or MIDI messages. The modulation destination
is a sound-shaping component such as a filter or a VCA.
Note On & Note Off This is the most important MIDI message. It determines the pitch and velocity of a generated
note. A note-on message will start a note. Its pitch is derived from the note number, which
can range from 0 to 127. The velocity ranges from 1 to 127. A velocity value of 0 is equivalent
to a note-off message.
Normalize
Normalization is a function to raise the level of a sample to its maximum (0 dB) without
causing distortion. This function automatically searches a sample for its maximum level and
consequently raises the entire sample’s level until the previously determined maximum level
reaches 0 dB. In general, this results in a higher overall volume of the sample.
Panning
The process or the result of changing a signal’s position within the stereo panorama.
Pitch-Bend
Pitch-bend is a MIDI message. Although pitch-bend messages are similar in function to
control change messages, they are a distinct type of message. The resolution of a pitch-bend
message is substantially higher than that of a conventional controller message. The human
ear is exceptionally sensitive to deviations in pitch, so the higher resolution is used because it
relays pitch-bend information more accurately.
207
Program
A program is a file that contains a list of all samples to be used, and settings for each sample
(e.g., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.) Program Edit Mode is where
you can edit and assign samples (read more about this in Operation > Modes > Program
Edit Mode). You can have a total of 128 programs in a project.
There are three kinds of programs that use samples for their sound source. Drum programs
are mostly used for creating drum programs and easy and quick assigning of samples to a
pad. With keygroup programs, you can use one sample (or more) and spread it across two or
more keys and play the sample chromatically over a keyboard. That way, there is no need to
sample every key of, for instance, a piano. Clip programs use several samples that can be
looped (clips), each of which can assigned to a pad; launching different combinations of clips
together lets you create intriguing, layered performances.
Program Change
These are MIDI messages that select sound programs. Programs 1–128 can be changed via
program change messages.
Release
An envelope parameter. This term describes the descent rate of an envelope to its minimum
value after a trigger is terminated. The release phase begins immediately after the trigger is
terminated, regardless of the envelope’s current status. For instance, the release phase may
be initiated during the attack phase.
Resonance
Resonance or emphasis is an important filter parameter. It emphasizes the frequencies around
the filter cutoff frequency by amplifying them with a narrow bandwidth. This is one of the most
popular methods of manipulating sounds. If you increase the emphasis to a level where the
filter enters a state of self-oscillation, it will generate a relatively pure sine waveform.
Root Key
The root key determines the original pitch of a recorded instrument or of a sample. Samples
in MPC contain the dedicated root key information. This information will be created
automatically during recording or importing.
Sample
When you press the pads on your MPC hardware, you can trigger sounds that we call
samples. Samples are digitized snippets of audio that can be recorded using the recording
(sampling) function of your MPC hardware or loaded from the Browser.
You can edit and process a sample in different ways. For example, a sample can be
trimmed, looped, pitch-shifted or processed, using various effects. When you have finished
editing your sample, you can assign it to one or more drum pads to play it. Samples can be
either mono or stereo.
Sample Rate
This is the frequency representing the amount of individual digital sample scans per second
that are taken to capture an analog signal digitally. For normal CD audio recordings, 44100
samples per second are used, also written as 44.1 kHz.
You can export audio using sampling rates up to 96 kHz (see Operation > General Features
> Audio Mixdown) and play audio using 44.1 kHz.
Sequence
A sequence is the most basic “building block” of music you can create within an MPC
project. MIDI information from your MPC hardware pads, buttons, and Q-Link knobs are
recorded to the tracks of a sequence. Each sequence on your MPC hardware can contain
128 MIDI tracks and 8 audio tracks. Each project can store up to 128 separate sequences.
The length of a sequence can be set from 1 to 999 bars, which would be enough to create an
entire song using only one sequence. However, MPC Studio has a dedicated Song Mode
that lets you chain sequences together to create a song.
Song
Song Mode that allows you to arrange different sections (verse, chorus, hook, etc.) in order
to build a song. Each song can have up to 999 “steps” (stages in which a sequence may play
one or more times). Each project can store up to 32 songs.
208
Stretch Factor
The stretch factor is a value generated by the Warp algorithm in the software. When you
record an audio file, the current sequence tempo will be embedded with it. This information
is stored within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track
region, the warping algorithm uses this sequence tempo and the current value in the BPM
field to generate the stretch factor.
Sustain
This term describes the level of an envelope remaining constant after it has passed the attack
and decay phases. Once reached, the sustain level is kept until the trigger is terminated.
Time-Stretch
See Warp below.
Track
A sequence on your MPC hardware can contain 128 MIDI tracks and 8 audio tracks.
Each MIDI track contains MIDI note events and controller data. In this case, the track
contains no audio information—only MIDI information that uses the samples in a program (or
an external MIDI sound module) to generate its audio. You can edit your performance in
many different ways once the performance has been captured.
Each audio track contains an audio signal that has been recorded or imported into your
project. You can edit this audio within the software and incorporate it into your sequences
alongside your MIDI tracks.
Trigger
A trigger is a signal that initiates events. Trigger signals are very diverse. For instance, a MIDI
note or an audio signal can be used as a trigger. The events a trigger can initiate are also
very diverse. A common application for a trigger is its use to start an envelope.
Warp
The Warp feature lengthens or shortens a region of an audio track or sample without
changing its pitch. This enables you to fit the length of an audio track or sample to the length
of a sequence, a bar in your sequence, etc. while maintaining its original key.
Please note that the Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio dropouts during playback if used too freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp
function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by doing any/all of the following:
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment of warped audio.
In Program Edit Mode, avoid using extreme Stretch values.
Avoid warping very small audio regions.
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number
of voices of the polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially
instances where the warped regions start at the same time.
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad
function to consolidate the affected pad’s layers into one audio sample. After you flatten
the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be warped. To see the user guide in the
MPC software and learn how to do this, click the Help menu, select MPC Help, and
select MPC User Manual.
209
MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
Your MPC hardware can send and receive MIDI Machine Control (MMC) messages, a standard protocol for transport
controls.
The MPC hardware can send these messages:
MPC Button
MMC Command Sent
Rec
MMC Record Strobe (when recording starts), then MMC Record Exit
Overdub
MMC Record Strobe (when recording starts), then MMC Record Exit
Stop
MMC Stop
Play
MMC Deferred Play
Play Start
MMC Locate Zero, then Deferred Play
Data Dial, –/+, </>, <</>>
MMC Locate values
To set up your MPC hardware to send MMC messages to an external device:
1. Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect your MPC hardware’s MIDI Out 1 to the MIDI input of your external
device.
2. In the MPC software window, enter the Preferences and use the Sync tab to set up MMC communication over
the MIDI port. To learn how to do this, please see the MPC software user guide: click the Help menu, select
MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
3. Configure your other device properly so it can receive MMC messages.
The MPC hardware can receive these messages:
MPC Command Received
MPC Function
MMC Deferred Play
Play
MMC Locate Zero, then Deferred Play
Play Start
MMC Stop
Stop
MMC Record Strobe
Record (Rec)
MMC Pause
Stop
MMC Locate values
Change location in sequence
To set up your MPC hardware to receive MMC messages from an external device:
1. Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect your MPC hardware’s MIDI In A to the MIDI output of your external
device.
2. In the MPC software window, enter the Preferences and use the Sync tab to set up MMC communication over
the MIDI port. To learn how to do this, please see the MPC software user guide: click the Help menu, select
MPC Help, and select MPC User Manual.
3. Configure your other device properly so it can send MMC messages.
210
Trademarks & Licenses
Akai Professional and MPC are trademarks of inMusic Brands, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Ableton is a trademark of Ableton AG.
ASIO and VST are trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
MPC software incorporates élastique Pro V3 by zplane.development.
Apple and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
All other product names, company names, trademarks, or trade names are those of their respective owners.
For complete legal information, visit akaipro.com/product-legal
211
Addenda
Updates in MPC 2.1
New Features
Step Sequencer: Velocity Adjustment via Q-Links
While using the Step Sequencer, you can now use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the velocity of the note event at each
step. The numbers of the steps that correspond to the Q-Link knobs will be shown in the screen. (This has been
added to Operation > Modes > Step Sequencer.)
To show the step numbers in the screen, press Shift+Prog Edit/Q-Links, and then press F5/Screen. Press
F6/Parameter/Value to switch between viewing the parameter names (Parameter) and values (Value) in the
screen.
To adjust the velocity of each note event, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to select a value (1–127).
To enter a note event at a step, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to change its velocity from 0 (Off) to a
value of 1 or greater.
To delete a note event from a step, set the corresponding Q-Link knob to its minimum position, 0 (Off).
212
List Editor
You can view and edit MIDI tracks in a List Editor. This mode displays all events in the track as a sequential list with
information about: the type of event; the MIDI note or pad, length, and velocity for note events; and the type and
value of automation events. This feature has been available since earlier releases of the MPC software but not
documented for use with MPC Renaissance or MPC Studio.
To open the List Editor, press Shift+Step Seq.
These are the buttons under the screen:
F1
T.C.
Press this button to open the Timing Correct/T.C. screen, which contains various
settings to help quantize the note events in your sequence. See General Features >
Timing Correct/T.C. to learn about this.
F2
Edit
Press this button to show three additional buttons to edit the track: F3/Delete, F4/Copy,
and F5/Move (all described below).
F3
Track
Press this button to select the track you are currently viewing in the List Editor.
F4
Nudge
Press this button to enable or disable the Nudge feature. When enabled, you can shift
the event forward or backward by the length of the current time division. See below to
learn how to use this.
F5
Insert
Press this button to show the Insert Event screen, which contains parameters you can
use to create an event in the track (described below).
F6
Play
Press this button to play the currently selected event. This works with note events only.
To insert an event, press F5/Insert to open the Insert Event screen.
Time is the position of the event you want to insert (in bars, beats, and ticks).
Type is the type of event you want to insert: Note, Program Automation, Program Mixer, Track Automation,
or Effect Automation.
Pad(Note) This is available when Type is set to Note or Program Automation.
Effect is the name of the effect and the number of its insert slot. This is available when Type is set to Effect
Automation.
Parameter is the type of modifier used via automation. This is available when Type is set to Program Automation,
Program Mixer, Track Automation, or Effect Automation.
F4/Close returns to the previous screen without inserting the event.
F5/Do It inserts the event and returns to the previous screen.
213
To edit an event, press F2/Edit and press one of the following buttons that appears:
F2/Edit returns to the previous screen.
F3/Delete deletes the currently selected event.
F4/Copy opens the Copy To screen.
Copy To is where the selected event in the track will be duplicated.
F3/Close returns to the previous screen without duplicating the event.
F4/Do It duplicates the event and returns to the previous screen.
F5/Move opens the Move To screen.
Move To is the desired location of the selected event in the track.
F3/Close returns to the previous screen without changing the time of the event.
F4/Do It changes the time of the event and returns to the previous screen.
Now is the time counter at the top of the screen, which shows the current playhead position. See General Features
> Now & Locators to learn about this.
The View menu lets you select what type of events are shown in the list.
All: Select this option to show all event types.
Notes: Select this option to show only notes.
Aftertouch: Select this option to show only aftertouch messages.
Trk Automation: Select this option to show only track automation events.
Prg Automation: Select this option to show only program automation events.
Pitch Bend: Select this option to show only pitch bend events.
Control Change: Select this option to show only MIDI CC messages.
Prg Change: Select this option to show only MIDI program change messages.
Ch Pressure: Select this option to show only channel pressure messages.
Solo/Mute: Select this option to show only solo and mute events for tracks, programs, and pads.
Other: Select this option to show other types of events not listed above, such as pad or keygroup parameters.
The BPM in the upper-right corner of the screen is the current tempo.
To set the tempo, use the BPM field or press Tap Tempo in time with the desired tempo.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo or a master tempo, press Shift+Tap Tempo.
214
Time is the position of the event in bars, beats, and ticks.
To change the time of an event, do one of the following:
•
Use the cursors to select the event, press F2/Edit, and then press F5/Move.
Move To is the desired location of the selected event in the track.
F3/Close returns to the previous screen without changing the time of the event.
F4/Do It changes the time of the event and returns to the previous screen.
•
Use the cursors to select the event, press F4/Nudge so the button is lit, and then use the left and right
cursors to shift the event forward or backward by the length of the current time division.
Type is the type of event.
Note: a MIDI note
Trk: a track-related parameter:
Track Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo)
Track MIDI CC Automation (0–127)
Track Parameter Automation (Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Channel Pressure, or Program Change)
Prg: a program-related parameter:
Program Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, or Send 1–4)
Program Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
Pad: a pad-related parameter:
Pad/Keygroup Mixer Automation (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Pad/Keygroup Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
FX: an effect-related parameter:
Program Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Keygroup Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Note is the pad and/or corresponding MIDI note number. For drum programs, you will see the pad number. For
keygroup programs, plugin programs, and midi programs, you will see the note.
To change the pad/note of a note event, use the cursors to select its Pad/Note value, and then use the data
dial or –/+ buttons to change it.
Length is the length of the note event in ticks. This is shown only for note events.
To change the length of a note event, use the cursors to select its Length value, and then use the data dial or
–/+ buttons to change it. You can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
215
Vel is the velocity of the note event. This is shown only for note events.
To change the velocity of a note event, use the cursors to select its Vel value, and then use the data dial or –/+
buttons to change it. You can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Mod Type/Value is the type of modifier used via automation and the automation value.
To change the automation value of an event, use the cursors to select its Value, and then use the data dial or
–/+ buttons to change it. You can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
To view the List Editor Settings, press Window.
Use the Follow Now Position field to set how the screen behaves relative to the audio playhead during playback.
Scroll: The list will scroll along in the background while keeping the audio playhead centered.
Off: The list will not move during playback.
Faster Attack for Amp Envelopes
In the amp envelope of a drum program or keygroup program, an attack value of 0 now produces a much faster
response, thus making your drum hits even punchier than before. (You can set the attack value in Program Edit Mode.
See Operation > Modes > Program Edit Mode > Drum Programs and Keygroup Programs to learn more.)
Important: Any drum or keygroup programs that you created and saved before this update will load in MPC 2.1 with
an attack value of 1 to ensure backwards compatibility.
216
Updates in MPC 2.3
New Features
Arpeggiator
MPC now includes a full-featured arpeggiator and phrase player for melodic program types.
To open the Arpeggiator settings:
1. Set the current track type to Plugin, Keygroup, MIDI, or CV.
2. Press and hold the Note Repeat button, then press F6/Arp.
Use the cursors to select each field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the parameter. If the field is
a number, you can use the numeric keypad to enter a number and then press Enter to confirm it.
Enable determines whether or not the arpeggiator feature is activated.
To enable or disable the Arpeggiator, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Latch determines whether the arpeggiator will continue to run when notes are released.
To enable or disable latching, set this field to On or Off (respectively).
Action determines what kind of arpeggiator will be used and its functions. There are four types of arpeggiator
function: Arpeggio, Note Repeat, Rhythm and Pattern.
To select the arpeggiator action, use this field. See below for a description of each action and its settings.
When the Arpeggio action is selected, hold down a chord and the arpeggiator will play a pattern based on the notes
held.
Pattern determines how the arpeggiator triggers the held notes.
Octaves is how many octaves of the held notes the arpeggiator will cycle through, from 1–3.
Step is the note value of each arpeggiator step, from 1/1–1/64 beats, including T (triplet) variations.
Length is the length of the played note in each step, from 1–100%.
Swing is the amount of "shuffle" added to your beats, from 50% (no swing, "straight") to 75% (extreme).
Vel is the velocity of the played notes. Select As played, From first note, Accented, Full, 3/4, Half or 1/4.
When the Note Repeat action is selected, hold down a note or chord for traditional MPC note repeat behavior.
Step is the note value of each arpeggiator step, from 1/1–1/64 beats, including T (triplet) variations.
Length is the length of the played note in each step, from 1–100%.
Spread is the amount of timing spacing of the held note, creating a glissando effect.
Vel is the velocity of the played notes. Select As played, From first note, Accented, Full, 3/4, Half or 1/4.
217
When the Rhythm action is selected, hold down a chord and the arpeggiator will play the held notes in a rhythmic
pattern.
Rhythm is the type of rhythm played.
Step is the note value of each arpeggiator step, from 1/1–1/64 beats, including T (triplet) variations.
Length is the length of the played note in each step, from 1–100%.
Spread is the amount of timing spacing of the held note, from 0–240, creating a glissando effect.
Vel is the velocity of the played notes. Select As played, From first note, Accented, Full, 3/4, Half or 1/4.
When the Pattern action is selected, hold down a single note to trigger a melodic phrase. As you change what note
is held, the melodic phrase will be transposed.
Pattern is the type of pattern played.
Length is the length of the played note in each step, from 1–100%.
Vel is the velocity of the played notes. Select As played, From first note, Accented, Full, 3/4, Half or 1/4.
To close the arpeggiator settings, press F4/Close.
Pad Perform Mode: Chromatic Type
You can now use Pad Perform Mode to set the pads to follow a chromatic layout. When the Chromatic type is
selected, each pad is assigned a note, ascending by one semitone with each pad. Pads with notes in the key
determined by the Scale will be lit, while pads with notes between the scale degrees will be unlit.
Q-Link Navigation Enhancements
Q-Link functionality has been enhanced in the following modes: Main Mode, Track View, Next Sequence, Grid Editor,
and Audio Edit Mode.
Set the Q-Link Mode to Screen in these pages to access the following controls:
Use Q-Link Knob 2 to adjust the playhead position.
Use Q-Link Knob 3 to scroll through the waveform in the large waveform display.
Use Q-Link Knob 4 to zoom in or zoom out at the playhead position.
Note: For MPC Studio, these are in the first Q-Link row.
218
Updates in MPC 2.4
New Features
Clip Program Improvements
The internal architecture of clip programs has been significantly improved. You can now play up to 16 clip programs
at the same time. Clips will continue to play when changing tracks or sequences, allowing you to seamlessly
incorporate them into live performance.
Next Sequence Mode
Next Sequence Mode now remembers the next sequence change when switching to another mode.
Additional Transport Controls
You can now hold Shift and press Stop to return the playhead to the beginning of the timeline.
219
Updates in MPC 2.6
New Features
Erase Parameters
From the Erase window, you can now erase selected automation parameters.
1. While the sequence is stopped, press the Erase button to open the Erase screen.
2. Set the Erase field to Automation.
3. By default, the Parameter field is set to All. Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to scroll through the list of all
parameters that have been automated on the current track.
4. Select the parameter you would like to erase, and then press F5/Do It to erase the automation.
Workflow Enhancements
The Keep or Discard screen in Sample Record Mode now has function button assignments to Save or Edit the
recorded sample.
In Sequence Edit Mode, you can now copy events from individual or multiple pads or notes from the Copy Events
screen.
Timing Correct can now be applied to all tracks by pressing the All Track function button in the Timing Correct
window.
220
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising